WO2023206579A1 - 通信方法和设备 - Google Patents

通信方法和设备 Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2023206579A1
WO2023206579A1 PCT/CN2022/090805 CN2022090805W WO2023206579A1 WO 2023206579 A1 WO2023206579 A1 WO 2023206579A1 CN 2022090805 W CN2022090805 W CN 2022090805W WO 2023206579 A1 WO2023206579 A1 WO 2023206579A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
mld
indication
link
emlsr
frame
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2022/090805
Other languages
English (en)
French (fr)
Inventor
卢刘明
黄磊
徐彦超
Original Assignee
Oppo广东移动通信有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Oppo广东移动通信有限公司 filed Critical Oppo广东移动通信有限公司
Priority to CN202280093616.0A priority Critical patent/CN118872309A/zh
Priority to PCT/CN2022/090805 priority patent/WO2023206579A1/zh
Publication of WO2023206579A1 publication Critical patent/WO2023206579A1/zh

Links

Images

Classifications

    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W24/00—Supervisory, monitoring or testing arrangements
    • H04W24/02—Arrangements for optimising operational condition

Definitions

  • the present application relates to the field of communication, and more specifically, to a communication method and device.
  • MLD Multi-Link Device
  • non-access point non-Access Point
  • non-AP non-Access Point
  • the embodiments of the present application provide a communication method and device, which can realize the reception of multicast frames in more scenarios.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides a communication method, including:
  • the first multi-link device MLD performs a first listening operation, where the first listening operation is used for the first station on the first MLD to receive a multicast frame using a first receiving capability.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides a communication method, including:
  • the second multi-link device MLD sends first information, the first information is used for the first multi-link device MLD to perform a first listening operation, the first listening operation is used for the first station on the first MLD Multicast frames are received using the first receiving capability.
  • This embodiment of the present application provides a first multi-link device, including:
  • a processing unit configured to perform a first listening operation, wherein the first listening operation is used for the first station on the first multi-link device MLD to receive a multicast frame using a first receiving capability.
  • This embodiment of the present application provides a second multi-link device, including:
  • a sending unit configured to send first information.
  • the first information is used for the first multi-link device MLD to perform a first listening operation.
  • the first listening operation is used for the first station on the first MLD to adopt the first listening operation.
  • An embodiment of the present application provides a first multi-link device, including a processor and a memory.
  • the memory is used to store computer programs, and the processor is used to call and run the computer program stored in the memory, so that the first multi-link device executes the above method applied to the first multi-link device.
  • An embodiment of the present application provides a second multi-link device, including a processor and a memory.
  • the memory is used to store computer programs, and the processor is used to call and run the computer program stored in the memory, so that the second multi-link device executes the above method applied to the second multi-link device.
  • An embodiment of the present application provides a chip for implementing the above method applied to the first multi-link device.
  • the chip includes: a processor, configured to call and run a computer program from a memory, so that the device installed with the chip executes the above method applied to the first multi-link device.
  • An embodiment of the present application provides a chip for implementing the above method applied to the second multi-link device.
  • the chip includes: a processor, configured to call and run a computer program from a memory, so that the device installed with the chip executes the above method applied to the second multi-link device.
  • Embodiments of the present application provide a computer-readable storage medium for storing a computer program.
  • the computer program When the computer program is run by a device, the device performs the above-mentioned method applied to the first multi-link device; or, executes the above-mentioned method applied to the first multi-link device. Two methods for multi-link devices.
  • An embodiment of the present application provides a computer program product, including computer program instructions, which cause the computer to execute the above method applied to the first multi-link device; or to execute the above method applied to the second multi-link device.
  • Embodiments of the present application provide a computer program that, when run on a computer, causes the computer to execute the above method applied to the first multi-link device; or to execute the above method applied to the second multi-link device.
  • Embodiments of the present application provide a communication system, including:
  • a first multi-link device for performing the method as described for the first multi-link device
  • the second multi-link device is configured to perform the method as described for the second multi-link device.
  • the first multi-link device MLD performs the first listening operation, which can realize the reception of multicast frames in more scenarios.
  • Figure 1 is a schematic diagram of an application scenario according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 2(A) is a schematic diagram of frame exchange triggered by MU-RTS trigger frame in EMLSR mode.
  • Figure 2(B) is an example of frame exchange triggered by BSR trigger frame in EMLSR mode.
  • Figure 3 is a schematic flowchart of a communication method 300 according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 4 is a schematic flowchart of a communication method 400 according to another embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 5 is a schematic block diagram of a first multi-link device 500 according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 6 is a schematic block diagram of a second multi-link device 600 according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 7(A) to 7(F) are schematic flow diagrams 1 to 6 of the implementation of the communication method in a specific example according to the embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 8 is a schematic block diagram of a communication device according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 9 is a schematic block diagram of a chip according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 10 is a schematic block diagram of a communication system according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • WLAN wireless local area network
  • WiFi Wireless Fidelity
  • the communication system 100 applied in the embodiment of the present application is shown in Figure 1 .
  • the communication system 100 may include an access point (Access Point, AP) 110, and a station (STATION, STA) 120 that accesses the network through the access point 110.
  • Access Point Access Point
  • STA station
  • AP is also called AP STA, that is, in a certain sense, AP is also a kind of STA.
  • STA is also called non-AP STA (non-AP STA).
  • Communication in the communication system 100 may be communication between AP and non-AP STA, communication between non-AP STA and non-AP STA, or communication between STA and peer STA, where peer STA It can refer to the device that communicates with the STA peer.
  • the peer STA may be an AP or a non-AP STA.
  • the AP is equivalent to a bridge connecting the wired network and the wireless network. Its main function is to connect various wireless network clients together and then connect the wireless network to the Ethernet.
  • the AP device can be a terminal device (such as a mobile phone) or a network device (such as a router).
  • the terminal device or network device has a chip that implements communication functions, such as a WLAN or WiFi chip.
  • the role of STA in the communication system is not absolute.
  • the mobile phone when the mobile phone is connected to the router, the mobile phone is a non-AP STA.
  • the mobile phone When the mobile phone is used as a hotspot for other mobile phones, the mobile phone acts as an AP. .
  • AP and non-AP STA can be devices used in the Internet of Vehicles, IoT nodes, sensors, etc. in the Internet of Things (IoT), smart cameras, smart remote controls, smart water meters, etc. in smart homes. and sensors in smart cities, etc.
  • IoT Internet of Things
  • non-AP STAs may support the 802.11be standard.
  • Non-AP STA can also support 802.11ax, 802.11ac, 802.11n, 802.11g, 802.11b and 802.11a and other current and future 802.11 family wireless LAN (wireless local area networks, WLAN) standards.
  • the AP may be a device supporting the 802.11be standard.
  • the AP can also be a device that supports multiple current and future 802.11 family WLAN standards such as 802.11ax, 802.11ac, 802.11n, 802.11g, 802.11b, and 802.11a.
  • the STA can be a mobile phone (Mobile Phone), tablet computer (Pad), computer, virtual reality (Virtual Reality, VR) device, augmented reality (Augmented Reality, AR) device that supports WLAN/WiFi technology, Wireless equipment in industrial control, set-top boxes, wireless equipment in self-driving, vehicle communication equipment, wireless equipment in remote medical, and wireless equipment in smart grid , wireless equipment in transportation safety, wireless equipment in smart city (smart city) or wireless equipment in smart home (smart home), wireless communication chips/ASIC/SOC/, etc.
  • the frequency bands that WLAN technology can support may include but are not limited to: low frequency bands (such as 2.4GHz, 5GHz, 6GHz) and high frequency bands (such as 45GHz, 60GHz).
  • Figure 1 exemplarily shows one AP STA and two non-AP STAs.
  • the communication system 100 may include multiple AP STAs and other numbers of non-AP STAs. This is not the case in the embodiment of the present application. Make limitations.
  • the "instruction” mentioned in the embodiments of this application may be a direct instruction, an indirect instruction, or an association relationship.
  • a indicates B which can mean that A directly indicates B, for example, B can be obtained through A; it can also mean that A indirectly indicates B, for example, A indicates C, and B can be obtained through C; it can also mean that there is an association between A and B. relation.
  • correlate can mean that there is a direct correspondence or indirect correspondence between the two, it can also mean that there is an associated relationship between the two, or it can mean indicating and being instructed, configuration and being. Configuration and other relationships.
  • EMLSR Enhanced Multi-link Single Radio
  • non-AP MLD can work on a specific subset of the established link set.
  • EMLSR mode the links in this specific subset The path is called an EMLSR link.
  • Non-AP MLD can monitor the channel status of the EMLSR link through the secondary station in the awake state working on the EMLSR link.
  • the listening operation includes performing clear channel assessment (Clear Channel Assessment, CCA) and receiving the initial control frame of the frame exchange sequence sent by the AP MLD.
  • the initial control frame adopts a spatial stream with a A non-HT (duplicate) physical layer protocol data unit (non-HT (duplicate) PPDU) is sent.
  • the AP attached to the AP MLD (also known as the attached AP) initializes the frame exchange with the non-AP MLD on one of the EMLSR links. It can transmit an initial control frame to the non-AP MLD to start the frame exchange process.
  • the initial control frame can be a Multiple User Request-To-Send (MU-RTS) trigger frame or a Buffer Status Report Poll (BSRP) trigger frame.
  • MU-RTS Multiple User Request-To-Send
  • BSRP Buffer Status Report Poll
  • the affiliated AP1 of the AP MLD transmits MU-RTS
  • the affiliated STA1 of the non-AP MLD transmits a short inter-frame interval (Short) at the end of the transmission.
  • CTS is sent after Interframe Space, SIFS).
  • the affiliated AP1 of the AP MLD sends an A-MPDU after one SIFS at the end of the transmission.
  • the affiliated STA1 of the non-AP MLD sends a block acknowledgment (BlockAck); here, the The above AP MLD and non-AP MLD are both in EMLSR mode.
  • the affiliated AP1 of AP MLD transmits BSRP to the affiliated STA1 of non-AP MLD1, the affiliated STA1 of non-AP MLD2, and the affiliated STA1 of non-AP MLD n respectively.
  • Trigger correspondingly, the affiliated STA1 of non-AP MLD, the affiliated STA1 of non-AP MLD2 to the affiliated STA 1 of non-AP MLD n respectively perform the frame exchange process until the affiliated STA1, non -The affiliated STA1 of AP MLD2 to the affiliated STA1 of non-AP MLDn respectively send EHT TB PPDU 1 with confirmation (EHT TB PPDU 1 with acknowledgmentment) and EHT TB PPDU 2 with confirmation (EHT TB PPDU 2 with acknowledgmentment) to Carry confirmed EHT TB PPDU n (EHT TB PPDU n with acknowledgment).
  • the AP MLD and non-AP MLD are both in EMLSR mode.
  • non-AP MLD in EMLSR mode, it is necessary to receive MU-RTS trigger frame or BSRP trigger frame, and after receiving the initial control frame of the frame exchange sequence (such as MU-RTS trigger frame or BSRP trigger frame), non -The AP MLD is able to send or receive frames on the link on which this initial control frame was received, and may not send or receive on other links in the EMLSR link until the end of the frame exchange sequence.
  • the non-AP MLD should be able to receive multiple packets using a Short Interframe Space (SIFS) after the end of the transmission of the response frame to the initial control frame request.
  • SIFS Short Interframe Space
  • PPDU Physical Layer Protocol Data Unit
  • the AP MLD should not send frames to the non-AP MLD on other links in the EMLSR link.
  • the non-AP MLD switches back (i.e. immediately switches back) to enabled listening operations on the link.
  • Each affiliated AP attached to the AP MLD (also known as the affiliated AP corresponding to the AP MLD, or the AP corresponding to the AP MLD) needs to immediately after receiving the Delivery Traffic Indication Map (DTIM) beacon frame.
  • DTIM Delivery Traffic Indication Map
  • Scheduling to send i.e., scheduling and sending) buffered multicast frames, except in the following cases, that is, a TWT scheduling AP (Target Wake Time scheduling AP, TWT scheduling AP) attached to the AP MLD, located at the beacon that sends the DTIM beacon frame Within the broadcast target wake time (TWT) service period within the interval, the cached multicast frame is scheduled to be sent.
  • TWT scheduling AP Target Wake Time scheduling AP
  • the affiliated STA (that is, the affiliated site) of the Non-AP MLD needs to follow the following operating rules and receive the multicast buffer unit (BU) sent by the affiliated AP corresponding to the AP MLD associated with the Non-AP MLD on the corresponding link:
  • BU multicast buffer unit
  • the cached multicast frame indication in the Traffic Indication Map (TIM) element of an affiliated AP of the AP MLD is received by any station affiliated with the non-AP MLD (that is, received by any affiliated station), Then the secondary station to which the non-AP MLD is attached, which is associated with the secondary AP and remains awake in order to receive multicast frames, needs to choose to receive all multicast frames scheduled to be transmitted on the link where the secondary AP is located.
  • TIM Traffic Indication Map
  • the second monitoring operation includes performing CCA and receiving the AP MLD transmission
  • the initial control frame used to initiate frame exchange includes MU-RTS trigger frame or BSRP trigger frame.
  • the characteristics of this second listening operation are: the non-AP MLD's affiliated sites corresponding to all links in the awake state in the EMLSR link are in the listening state; moreover, the capability of this second listening operation is limited
  • MCS Modulation and Coding Scheme
  • SS spatial Stream
  • BW Bandwidth
  • the AP MLD supports EMLSR mode and there is a Non-AP MLD associated with itself and working in EMLSR mode, if the AP MLD is on the EMLSR link and the affiliated AP is on the corresponding link, it will not be sent first.
  • MU-RTS control frames multicast frames with higher order or more SS video service data are directly sent, and the non-AP MLD is on the link (that is, the attached AP sends higher order or
  • the affiliated station (for example, affiliated station A) on the link (for example, the affiliated station A) on the link containing multicast frames of more SS video service data is the target receiving station of the multicast frame.
  • the affiliated station A is limited by the coding rate/MCS/SS/BW processing capabilities of the received frame and cannot correctly receive higher order or more SSs. Multicast frame of video service data.
  • the station on the EMLSR link directly receives (for example, directly receives without receiving the MU-RTS trigger frame in advance) using a higher order or more SS.
  • This application solution provides a mechanism for receiving multicast frames. This mechanism can support AP MLD in EMLSR mode to send multicast frames, while ensuring that non-AP MLD can normally receive multicast frames of higher order or more SSs in EMLSR mode.
  • this application solution also proposes the monitoring operation of non-AP MLD on the EMLSR link to meet the reception of multicast frames in special scenarios.
  • FIG 3 is a schematic flowchart of a communication method 300 according to an embodiment of the present application. This method can optionally be applied to the system shown in Figure 1, but is not limited thereto. The method includes at least part of the following.
  • the first multi-link device MLD performs a first listening operation, where the first listening operation is used for the first station on the first MLD to receive multicast frames using the first receiving capability.
  • the first site is an affiliated site of the first MLD.
  • the first site is a site corresponding to the first link on the first MLD, and the first site is used to monitor the first link. That is to say, the first monitoring operation uses The first station is in a monitoring state to monitor the channel status of the first link.
  • the first site may also be called a listening site.
  • the first link is a link that sends the multicast frame.
  • the first MLD is an MLD operating in an enhanced multi-link single radio EMLSR mode, and accordingly, the first link is a link in an EMLSR link.
  • the first MLD is a non-access point non-AP MLD.
  • the first MLD is a non-AP MLD operating in the EMLSR mode and associated with the AP MLD (such as the second MLD).
  • S310 is specifically: the non-access point non-AP MLD working in the EMLSR mode performs a first listening operation, wherein the first listening operation is used for the first station on the non-AP MLD ( That is, the listening station) monitors the first link in the EMLSR link, so that the first station can pass the first link and receive the multicast frame using the first receiving capability.
  • the first link may be a link through which the AP MLD associated with the non-AP MLD sends multicast frames.
  • the AP MLD also works in EMLSR mode.
  • the access point AP (that is, the affiliated AP) on the AP MLD can send a multicast frame to the first station affiliated to the non-AP MLD through the first link.
  • both ends of the link in an EMLSR link correspond to the station on the non-AP MLD and the affiliated AP on the AP MLD; the affiliated AP sends multicast frames through the link, and accordingly, the station receives them through the link.
  • Multicast frame That is to say, for a site, a site corresponds to a link, and at the same time, it also corresponds to an AP.
  • the AP sends multicast frames through its corresponding link.
  • the site receives multicast frames through its corresponding link. . That is, sites, links, and APs can correspond to each other one by one.
  • the first receiving capability is greater than or equal to the second receiving capability; the second receiving capability is the receiving capability adopted by the first station when the first MLD performs a second listening operation. Wherein, the first receiving capability may be greater than the second receiving capability.
  • the first receiving capability is the receiving capability in the EMLSR mode, that is, the first receiving capability is the receiving capability of the first station affiliated to the first MLD in the EMLSR mode.
  • the The second receiving capability is also the receiving capability in the EMLSR mode, that is, the second receiving capability is the receiving capability of the first station affiliated to the first MLD in the EMLSR mode.
  • the first receiving capability includes at least one of the following: a first rate, a first modulation and coding strategy MCS, a first spatial stream SS, and a first bandwidth BW.
  • the second receiving capability includes at least one of the following: a second rate, a second modulation and coding strategy MCS, a second spatial stream SS, and a second bandwidth BW; the second receiving capability is a second The receiving capability of the first station under listening operation.
  • the first rate is greater than or equal to the second rate; the first MCS is greater than or equal to the second MCS; the first SS is greater than or equal to the second SS; the first BW is greater than or equal to the second BW .
  • the solution of this application does not limit the number of parameters included in the first receiving capability (or the second receiving capability).
  • it may be one, two, or more of the above parameters.
  • the parameters included in the first receiving capability and the parameters included in the second receiving capability may be the same or different; the number of parameters included in the first receiving capability may be different from the number of parameters included in the second receiving capability.
  • the number of parameters included in the receiving capability may be the same or different, and this application solution does not limit this.
  • the first receiving capability is greater than the second receiving capability if at least one parameter (at least one of the above parameters) of the first receiving capability is greater than the parameter corresponding to the second receiving capability.
  • the first rate included in the first receiving capability is greater than the second rate included in the second receiving capability.
  • the parameter is equal to the corresponding parameter included in the second receiving capability, and the first receiving capability can also be considered to be greater than or better than the second receiving capability.
  • the first SS included in the first receiving capability is equal to the second SS included in the second receiving capability. At this time, since the first rate included in the first receiving capability is greater than the second rate included in the second receiving capability, Therefore, it can still be considered that the first receiving capability is greater than the second receiving capability.
  • all parameters included in the first receiving capability are greater (or better than) than parameters corresponding to the second receiving capability. This ensures that multicast frames in more scenarios can be received. Specifically, since the first station on the first MLD has the first receiving capability (or has better first receiving capability), even if the initial control frame is not received in advance, such as the MU-RTS trigger Under the premise of frames, it is still possible to receive multicast frames sent with higher capabilities. For example, it is still possible to receive the second MLD with higher rate, or higher MCS (also called better MCS), or higher BW. Or more multicast frames sent by SS etc.
  • the first MLD also includes a second station; the first monitoring operation is also used for the second station to monitor the second link in the EMLSR link. (That is, the second site is in a listening state), the second link is a link in the EMLSR link other than the first link; further, the second site also has all Describe the first receiving ability. That is to say, when the first station has the first receiving capability under the first listening operation, the second station on the first MLD may also be in a listening state to receive signals other than the first link. to monitor other links; at this time, the second station may also have the first receiving capability.
  • the first listening operation is also used for the second station to perform the first listening operation.
  • the second link in the EMLSR link performs monitoring, the second site is a site on the first MLD, and the second link is a link in the EMLSR link other than the first link. link; or, in the case where the first multi-link device MLD performs the first listening operation to switch the first multi-link device from the second listening operation to the first listening operation, the first listening operation The operation makes it impossible for the second site to monitor.
  • the first station when the first station has the first receiving capability under the first listening operation, there may be one second station in the awake state on the first MLD, or There are multiple, and this application plan does not limit this.
  • the first station when the first station has the first receiving capability under the first listening operation, all the second stations in the awake state on the first MLD can be in the listening state, and all the second stations have the first receiving capability. 1. Receiving ability.
  • the receiving capabilities of the first station and the second station may also be different.
  • the second station has the second receiving capability, or other receiving capabilities.
  • This application solution does not limit this, as long as The first station is in the first receiving capability and can receive multicast frames normally, which all fall within the protection scope of the solution of this application.
  • the first listening operation (that is, the first listening operation in the EMLSR mode) may specifically refer to: working on the non-AP MLD in the EMLSR mode, with a specific link in the EMLSR link (such as the first
  • the affiliated site (referred to as the listening site, such as the first site) corresponding to the link) can receive multicast frames sent at a higher rate/higher MCS/more SS/higher BW.
  • the higher rate/higher MCS/more SS/higher BW mentioned in the solution of this application refers to: at least one or more of higher rate, higher MCS, more SS and higher BW. ; i.e. at least one.
  • the affiliated station Under the first monitoring operation, the affiliated station (such as the first station) can enter the monitoring state corresponding to the frame exchange processing of a specific link (such as the first link) in the EMLSR link; that is, the first monitoring operation Under operation, the frame reception capability (also known as the frame processing capability) of the affiliated station (such as the first station) corresponding to a specific link (such as the first link), and the ability to perform frame exchange processing with the specific link Consistent, that is, it can receive multicast frames sent at a higher rate/higher MCS/more SS/higher BW. Moreover, in this state, other links in the EMLSR link except the specific link (such as the first link) cannot monitor, that is, other links except the specific link cannot send or receive frames.
  • the transceiver capabilities in the EMLSR link (such as the transceiver capabilities of other stations in the EMLSR link) can be merged into the first site by switching and merging links, so that the first site has stronger The first receiving ability.
  • the affiliated site (such as the first site) where the specific link (such as the first link) in the EMLSR mode is located has the ability to receive higher rate/higher MCS/higher BW/higher
  • the ability to send multicast frames from multiple SSs thus keeping all awake affiliated stations (such as the second station) in the listening state in the EMLSR link.
  • the affiliated station in the awake state (such as the second station) may have the same or different receiving capabilities as the first station.
  • This application solution does not limit this, as long as the first station has the ability to receive at a higher rate/higher rate.
  • the ability of multicast frames sent by MCS/higher BW/more SSs all fall within the protection scope of the solution of this application. It can be understood that since link merging is not performed in this case, the receiving capability of the first station at this time may be weaker than the receiving capability after link merging is switched.
  • the second monitoring operation is used for the target site on the first MLD (that is, the affiliated site of the first MLD) to monitor the link corresponding to the target site, wherein:
  • the target station is a station in an awake state on the first MLD, and the target station has the second receiving capability.
  • the second receiving capability includes at least one of the following: performing idle channel assessment CCA, receiving Initial control frame that initiates frame exchange.
  • the second listening operation can cause two or more target sites on the first MLD to Has second receiving capability.
  • the affiliated stations in the awakened state on the first MLD can be in the listening state, and the The affiliated stations in the listening state all have the second receiving capability, for example, have a lower second receiving capability relative to the first receiving capability.
  • the second listening operation (that is, the first listening operation in EMLSR mode) may specifically refer to: on the non-AP MLD working in EMLSR mode, all affiliated stations in the awake state corresponding to the EMLSR link ( That is, the target site), are all in the listening state; wherein, the receiving capability of each site corresponding to the EMLSR link, that is, the second receiving capability, is limited, except for being able to perform CCA or MU-RTS triggering frames In addition to the reception of initial control frames, other types of frames cannot be received correctly due to limitations in rate/MCS/SS/BW and other capabilities.
  • the first MLD receives the multicast frame through the first station employing the first receiving capability. Further, the multicast frame received using the first receiving capability is carried by a physical layer protocol data unit PPDU, and the PPDU includes at least one of the following:
  • Orthogonal frequency division multiplexing OFDM physical layer protocol data unit PPDU OFDM physical layer protocol data unit
  • Non-high throughput non-HT replication DUP PPDU
  • a non-AP MLD working in EMLSR mode can receive a higher rate/higher MCS at the affiliated site (such as the first site) corresponding to a specific link (i.e., the first link) in the EMLSR link.
  • SS Spatial Streams
  • the PPDU can be at least one of the following: OFDM PPDU, non-HT DUP PPDU, VHT PPDU, HT PPDU, HE SU PPDU, EHT MU PPDU, including PPDU supported by EHT STA, thus ensuring that the non -AP MLD can correctly receive PPDUs that use at least one of the following parameters and carry multicast frames.
  • the parameters include: higher rate, higher MCS, more SS and higher BW.
  • the first MLD switches from the first listening operation to the second listening operation when reception of the multicast frame is completed.
  • the non-AP MLD completes the reception of the multicast frame
  • the non-AP MLD confirms the completion of the multicast frame reception based on the indication, or when the multicast frame is in the broadcast TWT service cycle or with a repeat
  • the non-AP MLD reaches the end time point of the broadcast TWT service cycle or GCR service cycle SP, and there is no multicast frame being received. In this case, switch from the first listening operation in the EMLSR mode to the second listening operation in the EMLSR mode.
  • the first multi-link device MLD performs the first monitoring operation in the following ways:
  • Method 1 The first MLD performs the first monitoring operation based on the first information; that is, S310 specifically includes: the first MLD performs the first monitoring operation based on the first information. Further, the first information is used by the first MLD to perform the first listening operation at or before the target time. That is, S310 is specifically: the first MLD causes the first MLD to perform the first listening operation at or before the target time based on the first information.
  • the first information includes a target time.
  • the first information is used for the first MLD to be executed at or before the target time included in the first information.
  • the first information does not include the target time.
  • the target time is received by the first MLD in advance.
  • the first information is used by the first MLD in advance.
  • the first listening operation is performed at or before the obtained target time.
  • the solution of this application does not limit whether the target time is carried in the first information. As long as the first information can cause the first MLD to perform the first monitoring operation at or before the target time, it falls under the protection of the solution of this application. scope.
  • step S310 specifically includes: the first multi-link device MLD switches from the second listening operation to the first listening operation; or the first multi-link device MLD maintains the execution of the Describe the first monitoring operation. Further, step S310 specifically includes: the first multi-link device MLD switches from the second monitoring operation to the first monitoring operation based on the first information; or, the first multi-link device MLD switches based on the first monitoring operation. The first information maintains the execution of the first monitoring operation.
  • the target time in Method 1 includes a first time point, and the first time point may specifically include at least one of the following:
  • the first MLD performs the first monitoring operation at the expected multicast frame sending time point, or at a time point before the expected multicast frame sending time point; here, the expected multicast frame
  • the sending time point can be any pre-agreed time point, and this application solution does not limit this.
  • the target beacon transmission time (TBTT) of the expected transmission traffic indication map DTIM beacon frame is later than the TBTT of the DTIM beacon frame .
  • the first MLD performs the first listening operation at the TBTT of the expected DTIM beacon frame, or at a time point before the TBTT of the expected DTIM beacon frame.
  • the first MLD performs the first listening operation at the start time of the broadcast target wake-up time TWT service period SP where the multicast frame is expected to be sent, or at a time point before the start time.
  • the first MLD has a non-STBC DTIM beacon frame whose current count value in the FMS counter field of the specific FMS flow is zero, or a non-STBC DTIM beacon frame whose current count value in the FMS counter field of the specific FMS flow is zero.
  • the first listening operation is performed at a time point before the TBTT of the STBC DTIM beacon frame.
  • the first MLD performs the first listening operation at the starting time of the multicast GCR service period with retry in which the multicast frame is expected to be sent, or at a time point before the starting time.
  • a non-AP MLD working in EMLSR mode performs the first listening operation at the expected multicast frame sending time point, or before the expected multicast frame sending time point, to schedule the sending of multicast frames in the EMLSR link.
  • the link where it is located (that is, the first link) is monitored.
  • a non-AP MLD working in EMLSR mode performs the first listening operation in advance before the expected multicast frame transmission time point to monitor the link where the multicast frame is scheduled to be sent in the EMLSR link (that is, the first link). road) to monitor.
  • the non-AP MLD working in EMLSR mode when performing the first listening operation, can receive multicast frames through the first link, and after confirming receipt of the multicast frames, switch to Second monitoring operation.
  • the non-AP MLD when the non-AP MLD is associated with an AP MLD that supports EMLSR mode, and the non-AP MLD operates in EMLSR mode on the EMLSR link, if the multicast frame will be scheduled to be transmitted on the non-AP
  • the site on one of the EMLSR links corresponding to the MLD for example, the first link
  • the non-AP MLD is on this link (for example, the first link) (set to site A, that is, the first site)
  • site A can monitor the link (that is, the first link) that transmits the multicast frame. channel) to listen so that multicast frames can be received correctly.
  • the method for the AP MLD's affiliated AP to schedule the sending of the buffered multicast frame may adopt at least one of the following:
  • the affiliated AP of AP MLD schedules and sends buffered multicast frames at the expected multicast frame sending time point; here, the expected multicast frame sending time point can be any pre-agreed time point.
  • This application solution is suitable for This is not a limitation.
  • the affiliated AP of the AP MLD schedules to send buffered multicast frames after sending DTIM beacon frames (beacon); for example, schedules to send buffered multicast frames after each DTIM beacon frame (beacon).
  • the affiliated AP of AP MLD schedules and sends multicast frames within the broadcast TWT service period SP; for example, an affiliated AP of AP MLD is a TWT scheduling AP (TWT scheduling AP), and the TWT scheduling AP is located at the location where the DTIM beacon frame is sent.
  • TWT scheduling AP TWT scheduling AP
  • the buffered multicast frame is scheduled to be sent within the broadcast TWT service period SP during the beacon interval.
  • the non-AP MLD when the AP MLD schedules to send buffered multicast frames after the DTIM beacon frame through a link in the EMLSR link (such as the first link), the non-AP MLD working in EMLSR mode, It will first enter the first monitoring operation of the link where the multicast frame is scheduled to be sent (such as the first link) at or before the expected DTIM beacon frame TBTT, that is, the first monitoring operation will be performed at or before the expected DTIM beacon frame TBTT. Operation to monitor the link where the multicast frame is scheduled to be sent (that is, the first link).
  • the non-AP MLD working in EMLSR mode after receiving the DTIM beacon frame, maintains the first monitoring operation (that is, maintaining frame exchange) for the link (such as the first link) where the multicast frame is scheduled to be sent. operation state), that is, the first monitoring operation is maintained to maintain monitoring of the link (such as the first link) where the multicast frame is scheduled to be sent until the reception of the multicast frame is completed.
  • the non-AP MLD receives an indication, for example, if the More Data subfield of the multicast frame sent by the AP on the first link is 0, it confirms that there are no more multicast frames.
  • the first listening operation also called a frame exchange operation
  • the non-AP MLD working in EMLSR mode will first send the multicast frame in the expected scheduled broadcast. On or before the start time of the TWT service period or GCR service period, enter the first listening operation in advance on the link where the multicast frame is scheduled to be sent (such as the first link), that is, enter the first listening operation in advance to monitor the multicast The link where the frame is scheduled to be sent (such as the first link) is monitored.
  • the non-AP MLD working in EMLSR mode after receiving the DTIM beacon frame, maintains the first monitoring operation (that is, maintaining frame exchange) for the link (such as the first link) where the multicast frame is scheduled to be sent.
  • operation state that is, the first monitoring operation is maintained to maintain monitoring of the link (such as the first link) where the multicast frame is scheduled to be sent until the reception of the multicast frame is completed.
  • the non-AP MLD when the non-AP MLD receives the instruction to confirm that there is no multicast frame (that is, it has received the multicast frame), the non-AP MLD returns to the EMLSR mode from the first listening operation (that is, the frame exchange operation) The second listening operation; or, when the end time point of the broadcast TWT service period or GCR service period (SP) is reached and there is no multicast frame being received, the first listening operation returns to the EMLSR mode. Second monitoring operation.
  • the first time point is received in advance by the first MLD; specifically, the first time point is a message received in advance by the first MLD from the associated second MLD. ; More specifically, the first time point is pre-received by the non-AP MLD from the associated AP MLD, for example, received before S310 to ensure that the first MLD sends the expected multicast frame
  • the first monitoring operation is performed in advance, so that the first station monitors the link in the EMLSR link where the multicast frame is scheduled to be sent.
  • the first information is a transmission traffic indication map DTIM beacon frame, and the DTIM beacon frame is used for the first MLD to perform the first monitoring operation at or before the target time. Further, the difference from the first method is that in the second method, the target time includes a second time point, that is, the DTIM beacon frame is used for the first MLD at the second time point or the second time. point before performing the first listening operation.
  • the DTIM beacon frame may include a target time (such as the second time point), that is, carry the target time.
  • the DTIM beacon frame is used for the first MLD
  • the first listening operation is performed before the target time or the target time carried by the DTIM beacon frame.
  • the DTIM beacon frame does not contain the target time, that is, it does not carry the target time; at this time, the target time is received in advance by the first MLD.
  • the DTIM beacon frame The first MLD is configured to perform the first listening operation at or before the pre-obtained target time.
  • the solution of this application does not limit whether the target time is carried in the DTIM beacon frame. As long as the DTIM beacon frame can cause the first MLD to perform the first listening operation at or before the target time, it all belongs to the solution of this application. scope of protection.
  • the first MLD performs the second listening operation before the TBTT of the DTIM beacon frame expected to be transmitted, that is, the second listening operation is performed by the first MLD before the expected transmission.
  • the target beacon transmission time of the DTIM beacon frame is performed before TBTT.
  • the first MLD performs the first listening operation based on the first information, which may specifically include: the first MLD switches from the second listening operation to the first listening operation at or before the second time point. operate.
  • the first MLD first performs the second listening operation before the TBTT of the DTIM beacon frame expected to be transmitted, and in the case of the second listening operation, receives the DTIM beacon frame, Then, at or before the second time point, switch from the second listening operation to the first listening operation, so that the first station of the first MLD has a lower second receiving capability. , switching to a first station with a higher receiving capability, thereby ensuring that the first station of the first MLD can normally receive multicast frames.
  • the second time point includes: the expected multicast frame sending time point after receiving the DTIM beacon frame; here, the DTIM beacon frame is received by the first MLD under the second listening operation. of. That is to say, the expected multicast frame sending time point is after the time point of sending the DTIM beacon frame.
  • the first MLD first receives the DTIM beacon frame, and after receiving the DTIM beacon frame, the expected The first listening operation is performed before the expected multicast frame sending time point after receiving the DTIM beacon frame. It can be understood that the first monitoring operation can be performed at a time point when the first MLD has received the DTIM beacon frame.
  • a non-AP MLD operating in EMLSR mode when preparing to receive multicast frames on one of the EMLSR links, can first enter the second listening operation before the TBTT of the DTIM beacon frame. And after receiving the DTIM beacon frame and before the time point at which the expected multicast frame is scheduled to be sent, switch from the second listening operation to the first listening operation, so that the first station of the first MLD responds to the EMLSR In the link, the link where the multicast frame is scheduled to be sent (such as the first link) is monitored.
  • the first station under the first listening operation, the first station has the first receiving capability, thus ensuring that the multicast frame can be received normally.
  • the non-AP MLD receives the multicast frame through the first station until the reception of the multicast frame is completed. If the non-AP MLD receives an indication confirming that there are no more multicast frames, it can be considered that the reception is completed. Subsequently, the first listening operation (that is, the frame exchange operation) is returned to the second listening operation.
  • the first listening operation that is, the frame exchange operation
  • the non-AP MLD associated with the AP MLD switches to the scheduled sending of multicast frames in the EMLSR link after receiving the DTIM beacon frame and before the time point when the multicast frame is sent or before the time point when the multicast frame is sent.
  • the first listening operation of the link (such as the first link).
  • Method 3 The first information is determined based on a first indication; the first indication is used to indicate whether to perform the first listening operation when a multicast frame needs to be received.
  • the first indication is specifically used to instruct to perform the first listening operation when it is necessary to receive a multicast frame, or to indicate that it is not necessary to perform the first listening operation when it is necessary to receive a multicast frame.
  • the first instruction can be expressed in the following two ways, including:
  • the first indication is used to uniformly indicate whether the first MLD corresponding to the access point AP performs the first listening operation when it needs to receive a multicast frame; here, the access point AP is the same as the first MLD.
  • the AP corresponding to the second MLD associated with the MLD; the AP corresponding to the second MLD includes at least one of the following: an affiliated AP of the second MLD, a multiple basic service set identifier set (multiple basic service set identifier set) where the affiliated AP of the second MLD is located.
  • the first MLD corresponding to the access point AP can be specifically: the first MLD corresponding to the first site corresponding to the access point AP; it can be understood that the link, such as the link in the EMLSR link
  • the two ends respectively correspond to the first site on the first MLD and the access point AP corresponding to the second MLD.
  • the site, link and AP can correspond one to one.
  • the access point AP Corresponds to the site, and the site corresponds to the first MLD.
  • the first indication does not carry the target time, for example, does not carry the first time point.
  • the purpose of the first indication is to indicate whether the first listening operation needs to be performed when multicast needs to be received. Based on this, the first time point may be obtained in advance by the first MLD through other methods, and the solution of this application does not specifically limit this. Or, in another case, the first indication not only indicates whether the first listening operation needs to be performed when multicast needs to be received, but can also carry a target time, such as a first time point. In this case, no first listening operation is required. MLD went ahead to get the first time point. In practical applications, the above two methods can be implemented alternatively, and this application plan is not limited.
  • the value of the first indication is a first value (for example, 1)
  • it is used to uniformly indicate that the first MLD corresponding to the access point AP needs to receive a multicast frame. Perform the first monitoring operation;
  • the value of the first indication is a second value (for example, 0)
  • it is used to uniformly indicate that the first MLD corresponding to the access point AP does not need to execute the first MLD when it needs to receive a multicast frame. A listening operation.
  • the first indication is carried by an EMLSR operation indication element. Further, the first indication is carried by a first field in the EMLSR operation indication element.
  • the first field includes a second indication; when the value of the second indication is a third value (for example, 1), the first field includes the first indication.
  • the first field is an EMLSR operation indication bitmap control.
  • the first instruction is an EMLSR operation unified instruction.
  • the second indication is the existence of a unified EMLSR operation indication; wherein the existence of the unified EMLSR operation indication is used to indicate whether the first field (that is, the EMLSR operation indication bitmap control) includes an EMLSR operation unified indication.
  • EMLSR operation indication element may also include other fields, and the solution of this application does not specifically limit the fields included.
  • Table 1 is an example of the fields (also called fields) included in the EMLSR operation indication element in the first case
  • Table 2 is an example of the fields included in the EMLSR operation indication bitmap control in the first case.
  • the EMLSR operation indication elements include element identification (Element ID), length (Length), and element identification extension (Element ID Extension); here, the element identification, length, and element identification extension all occupy 1 Bytes, the specific definition can be similar to the definition in relevant standards.
  • EMLSR operation indicator element also includes an EMLSR operation indicator bitmap control (EMLSR Operation Indicator Bitmap Control), which also occupies 1 byte.
  • EMLSR Operation Indicator Bitmap Control EMLSR Operation Indicator Bitmap Control
  • the EMLSR operation indication bitmap control includes EMLSR Operation for ALL Indicator Present (EMLSR Operation for ALL Indicator Present).
  • the EMLSR Operation Indication bitmap control also includes: EMLSR Operation for ALL Indicator and Reserved.
  • the EMLSR operation unified indication existence, EMLSR operation unified indication and reservation occupy 1 bit, 1 bit and 6 bits respectively. Based on this, the EMLSR operation unified indication existence, EMLSR operation unified indication and reservation included in the EMLSR operation indication bitmap control occupy one byte in total.
  • the EMLSR operation unified indication (or EMLSR operation unified indication field, also known as the first indication) is used to uniformly indicate whether the AP's corresponding non-AP MLD working in EMLSR mode needs to receive multicast frames.
  • a first listening operation is performed. The first listening operation is used on the non-AP MLD and the first station corresponding to the AP has the first receiving capability, thereby causing the first station to monitor the link where the AP is located.
  • the EMLSR operation unified indication is used to uniformly indicate whether the non-AP MLD corresponding to the AP working in the EMLSR mode needs to receive multicast frames with higher rate/higher MCS/more SS/
  • the receiving capability of the higher BW that is, the first receiving capability
  • the first monitoring operation of the link where the AP is located such as the first link
  • the AP is at least one of the following: an affiliated AP of AP MLD, or an AP pointed to by the BSSID in the multiple BSSID set where the affiliated AP of AP MLD is located.
  • the non-AP MLD is associated with the AP MLD.
  • the non-AP MLD corresponding to the AP working in the EMLSR mode can be specifically: the non-AP MLD working in the EMLSR mode corresponding to the site (such as the first site) corresponding to the AP.
  • the EMLSR operation unified indication value when the EMLSR operation unified indication value is 1, it means that the non-AP MLD corresponding to the AP working in the EMLSR mode performs a higher rate/higher MCS when it needs to receive multicast frames. /More spatial streams (SS)/Higher BW receiving capability (that is, the first receiving capability), and the first listening operation of the link where the AP is located (such as the first link).
  • SS spatial streams
  • Higher BW receiving capability that is, the first receiving capability
  • the first listening operation of the link where the AP is located such as the first link.
  • the EMLSR operation unified indication value is 0, it means that the corresponding non-AP MLD of the AP works in EMLSR mode.
  • SS higher BW receiving capability
  • the first listening operation of the link where the AP is located such as the first link
  • the EMLSR operation indication element is carried by a management frame.
  • the first information may be specifically a management frame.
  • the first MLD receives the management frame. Specifically, before S310, the first MLD receives the management frame.
  • the first MLD receives the management frame sent by the second MLD, so as to facilitate performing the first monitoring operation based on the management frame; here, in an example, the management frame includes a traffic indication map TIM beacon frame.
  • the position of each bit in the first indication is used to indicate the access point AP;
  • each bit in the first indication is used to indicate whether the first MLD corresponding to the access point AP performs the first listening operation when it needs to receive a multicast frame.
  • the access point AP is an AP corresponding to the second MLD associated with the first MLD; the AP corresponding to the second MLD includes at least one of the following: an affiliated AP of the second MLD, the second MLD The AP pointed to by the BSSID in the multi-BSSID set where the MLD's affiliated AP is located.
  • the first MLD corresponding to the access point AP can be specifically: the first MLD corresponding to the first site corresponding to the access point AP; it can be understood that the link, such as the link in the EMLSR link
  • the two ends respectively correspond to the first site on the first MLD and the access point AP corresponding to the second MLD.
  • the site, link and AP can correspond one to one.
  • the access point AP Corresponds to the site, and the site corresponds to the first MLD.
  • the first indication does not carry the target time, for example, does not carry the first time point.
  • the purpose of the first indication is to indicate whether the first listening operation needs to be performed when multicast needs to be received. Based on this, the first time point may be obtained in advance by the first MLD through other methods, and the solution of this application does not specifically limit this. Or, in another case, the first indication not only indicates whether the first listening operation needs to be performed when multicast needs to be received, but can also carry a target time, such as a first time point. In this case, no first listening operation is required. MLD went ahead to get the first time point. In practical applications, the above two methods can be implemented alternatively, and this application plan is not limited.
  • each bit in the first indication when the value of each bit in the first indication is a fourth value (such as 1), it is used to indicate that the first MLD corresponding to the access point AP needs to receive the multicast frame. In this case, perform the first monitoring operation;
  • each bit in the first indication is a fifth value (such as 0)
  • it is used to indicate that the first MLD corresponding to the access point AP does not need to perform all the steps when it needs to receive a multicast frame. Describe the first monitoring operation.
  • the first indication is carried by an EMLSR operation indication element. Further, the first indication is carried by a second field in the EMLSR operation indication element.
  • the second field is a partial EMLSR operation indication bitmap; the partial EMLSR operation indication bitmap is formed by intercepting some consecutive bits in the EMLSR operation indication bitmap.
  • the EMLSR operation indication element includes a first field; wherein, when the value of the second indication in the first field is a sixth value (such as 0), the first The field includes a third indication; the third indication is used to indicate the position of some consecutive bits intercepted from the EMLSR operation indication bitmap.
  • the third indication is a bitmap offset. In this way, the partial EMLSR operation indication bitmap can be intercepted from the EMLSR operation indication bitmap based on the bitmap offset. .
  • the first field is an EMLSR operation indication bitmap control.
  • the first instruction is an EMLSR operation unified instruction.
  • the second indication is the existence of a unified EMLSR operation indication; wherein the existence of the unified EMLSR operation indication is used to indicate whether the first field (that is, the EMLSR operation indication bitmap control) includes an EMLSR operation unified indication.
  • the EMLSR operation indication bitmap control includes the EMLSR operation unified indication.
  • it may also include a predetermined Keep.
  • the EMLSR operation unified indication is used to uniformly indicate whether the corresponding first MLD needs to perform the first listening operation.
  • the EMLSR operation uniformly indicates that the existing value is a sixth value (for example, 0)
  • the EMLSR operation indicates that the bitmap control includes the bitmap offset.
  • the EMLSR operation indication element also needs to include a part of the EMLSR operation indication bitmap, and then use the part of the EMLSR operation indication bitmap to indicate whether the corresponding first MLD needs to perform the first listening operation.
  • EMLSR operation indication element may also include other fields, and the solution of this application does not specifically limit the fields included.
  • first value, second value to sixth value are only a specific example.
  • first value, second value to sixth value can also take other values, such as 2, Any value such as 3 or 10, this application plan does not limit this.
  • Table 3 is an example of the fields (also called domains) included in the EMLSR operation indication element in the second case;
  • Table 4 is an example of the indication included in the EMLSR operation indication bitmap control in the second case. .
  • the EMLSR operation indication elements include element identification (Element ID), length (Length), and element identification extension (Element ID Extension); here, the element identification, length, and element identification extension all occupy 1 Bytes, the specific definition can be similar to the definition in relevant standards.
  • the EMLSR operation indication element also includes an EMLSR operation indication bitmap control (EMLSR Operation Indicator Bitmap Control) and a partial EMLSR operation indication bitmap (Partial EMLSR Operation Indicator Bitmap); wherein, the EMLSR operation indication bitmap control occupies 1 byte.
  • the partial EMLSR operation indication bitmap occupies any number of bytes in the range of 1-251.
  • the number of bytes occupied by the bitmap indicated by this part of the EMLSR operation is 0.
  • the EMLSR operation indication bitmap control includes EMLSR Operation for ALL Indicator Present (EMLSR Operation for ALL Indicator Present).
  • EMLSR Operation for ALL Indicator Present When the value of the EMLSR Operation for ALL Indicator Present is 0, the EMLSR Operation Indicates bitmap control also includes: bitmap offset (Bitmap Offset).
  • bitmap Offset Bitmap Offset
  • the EMLSR operation uniformly indicates existence and bitmap offset occupy 1 bit and 7 bits respectively. Based on this, the EMLSR operation indication bitmap control included in the EMLSR operation unified indication existence and the bitmap offset occupy one byte.
  • bitmap offset can be similar to the definition of the bitmap offset (Bitmap Offset) field of the TIM element in the relevant standard. The difference is that the bitmap offset (Bitmap Offset) field of the TIM element in the relevant standard corresponds to Traffic indication virtual bitmap, and the bitmap offset in this application solution corresponds to the EMLSR operation indication bitmap.
  • the partial EMLSR operation indication bitmap (also called the partial EMLSR operation indication bitmap domain, or field) is formed by intercepting some meaningful continuous bits in the EMLSR operation indication bitmap, and the interception method is consistent with relevant standards.
  • the TIM element in the TIM element forms the partial traffic mark virtual bitmap in the same way.
  • the partial traffic mark virtual bitmap is formed by intercepting bits at partial consecutive positions of the traffic mark virtual bitmap; the difference lies in the different definitions of the bit values between the two.
  • the position of each bit in the EMLSR operation indication bitmap corresponds to the AP.
  • the AP is at least one of the following: the affiliated AP of the AP MLD, and the BSSID of the multi-BSSID set where the affiliated AP of the AP MLD is located.
  • the bit positions in the EMLSR operation indication bitmap are defined, and the traffic indication virtual bitmap of the TIM element in the relevant standards is the same as the AP and bit positions when there is a multicast frame cache in the traffic indication virtual bitmap. The correspondence between positions is defined consistently.
  • each bit in the EMLSR operation indication bitmap indicates whether the AP corresponding to this bit, when there is a multicast frame cache, and the non-AP MLD corresponding to the AP working in EMLSR mode, executes the first Monitoring operation, the first monitoring operation is used on the non-AP MLD and the first station corresponding to the AP has the first receiving capability, so that the first station monitors the link where the AP is located.
  • the value of each bit in the EMLSR operation indication bitmap indicates: whether the non-AP MLD corresponding to the AP working in EMLSR mode in the EMLSR mode performs the first monitoring when it needs to receive multicast frames. Operation, the first monitoring operation is used on the non-AP MLD and the first station corresponding to the AP has the first receiving capability, so that the first station monitors the link where the AP is located.
  • the value of each bit in the EMLSR operation indication bitmap indicates whether the AP corresponding to this bit needs the non-AP MLD corresponding to the AP to work in EMLSR mode when there is a multicast frame buffer. Execute It has the receiving capability of higher rate/higher MCS/more SS/higher BW (that is, the first receiving capability) and is in the first listening operation of the link where the AP is located (such as the first link). In other words, the value of each bit in the EMLSR operation indication bitmap indicates: The AP corresponding to this bit corresponds to the non-AP MLD working in EMLSR mode.
  • the non-AP MLD corresponding to the AP working in the EMLSR mode can be specifically: the non-AP MLD working in the EMLSR mode corresponding to the site (such as the first site) corresponding to the AP.
  • the non-AP MLD is associated with the AP MLD.
  • the AP when the value of a certain bit in the EMLSR operation indication bitmap is 1, it indicates the AP corresponding to the bit.
  • the AP needs to correspond to the non-AP MLD working in EMLSR mode. Perform the first listening operation that has higher rate/higher MCS/more SS/higher BW receiving capabilities and is on the link where the AP is located;
  • the AP corresponding to the bit has multicast frame buffering. There is no need for the non-AP MLD corresponding to the AP to work in EMLSR mode when executing. Higher rate/higher MCS/more SS/higher BW receiving capabilities, and is in the first listening operation of the link where the AP is located.
  • the EMLSR operation indication element is carried by a management frame.
  • the first information may be specifically a management frame.
  • the first MLD receives the management frame. Specifically, before S310, the first MLD receives the management frame.
  • the first MLD receives the management frame sent by the second MLD, so as to facilitate performing the first monitoring operation based on the management frame; here, in an example, the management frame may also specifically include traffic Indicates the TIM beacon frame.
  • the first information is a target initial control frame, used to inform that the multicast frame is to be sent after the target initial control frame.
  • the target initial control frame does not require a reply.
  • the first MLD receives the target initial control frame.
  • the target initial control frame is the second MLD that needs the first MLD to execute the first Sent under the condition of listening operation
  • the second MLD is the MLD associated with the first MLD.
  • the second MLD when it expects to use a higher rate/higher MCS/more SS/higher BW to send multicast frames, it can send the target initial control frame to the first MLD in advance to inform the target of the The multicast frame is sent after the initial control frame, causing the first MLD to perform a first listening operation in order to normally receive the multicast frame sent using a higher rate/higher MCS/more SS/higher BW.
  • the first multi-link device MLD performs a first listening operation, specifically: the first MLD switches from a second listening operation to the first listening operation, and more specifically, the first MLD switches to the first listening operation.
  • An MLD switches from the second listening operation to the first listening operation after receiving the target initial control frame; or, in another case, the first MLD currently (i.e., receives the target initial control frame) (or before the control frame) is under the first monitoring operation.
  • the first MLD currently (i.e., receives the target initial control frame) (or before the control frame) is under the first monitoring operation.
  • there is no need to switch and it is only necessary to continue to maintain the first monitoring operation, that is, to continue to perform the first monitoring operation. In this way, multicast frames sent using a higher rate/higher MCS/more SS/higher BW are normally received.
  • the target initial control frame includes an indication duration
  • the indication duration is the maximum available duration for the first MLD to switch to the first listening operation. That is to say, when switching is required, the first MLD needs to switch to the first listening operation within the maximum available time period, so as to facilitate normal reception of multicast frames.
  • the first multi-link device MLD performs a first listening operation, specifically: the first MLD switches from the second listening operation to the first listening operation, and more specifically, the first MLD switches from the second listening operation to the first listening operation.
  • the target initial control frame is a variant of a multi-user request to send MU-RTS trigger frame. Further, the value of the trigger type subfield of the MU-RTS trigger frame of the variant is different from the value of the trigger type subfield of the MU-RTS trigger frame.
  • the target initial control frame such as a variant MU-RTS trigger frame
  • the target initial control frame is used to inform that a multicast frame is sent after the MU-RTS trigger frame.
  • the purpose of the variant MU-RTS trigger frame is to inform the first MLD to send a multicast frame after the MU-RTS trigger frame, and the multicast frame sent adopts a higher rate/ Higher MCS/more SS/higher BW. Therefore, after receiving the MU-RTS trigger frame of the variant, the first MLD does not need to reply. It only needs to respond within the indicated duration carried by the MU-RTS trigger frame of the variant.
  • the first MLD is in the first monitoring operation when it receives the variant MU-RTS trigger frame. At this time, there is no need to reply and it only needs to continue to execute the first monitoring operation. Just monitor the operation.
  • an AP MLD working in EMLSR mode when an AP MLD working in EMLSR mode is expected to use a higher rate/higher MCS/more SS/higher BW to send a multicast frame, it can pre-send the multicast frame without reply before sending the multicast frame.
  • Target initial control frame such as a variant MU-RTS trigger frame, to inform (such as informing the non-AP MLD associated with the AP MLD working in EMLSR mode that the non-AP MLD also works in EMLSR mode)
  • the multicast frame is sent after the target initial control frame, and the multicast frame sent adopts a higher rate/higher MCS/more SS/higher BW; at the same time, the target initial control frame can carry the specified padding (bit Filling) duration (that is, indicating duration) to ensure that the non-AP MLD working in EMLSR mode is on a specific link in the EMLSR link (that is, the link that sends multicast frames, such as the first link) There is enough time to switch to the first listening operation in advance to facilitate normal reception of multicast frames.
  • bit Filling that is, indicating duration
  • Figure 4 is a schematic flow chart of a communication method 400 according to an embodiment of the present application. This method can optionally be applied to the system shown in Figure 1, but is not limited thereto. The method includes at least part of the following.
  • the second multi-link device MLD sends first information, the first information is used for the first multi-link device MLD to perform a first listening operation, and the first listening operation is used for the first MLD on the first MLD.
  • a station uses the first receiving capability to receive multicast frames.
  • both the first MLD and the second MLD are MLDs operating in EMLSR mode.
  • the second MLD is an access point AP MLD
  • the first MLD is a non-access point non-AP MLD corresponding to the AP MLD.
  • the second MLD is an MLD working in the EMLSR mode
  • the first MLD is a non-AP MLD working in the EMLSR mode and associated with the AP MLD (that is, the second MLD).
  • the first site is an affiliated site of the first MLD.
  • the first site is a site corresponding to the first link on the first MLD, and the first site is used to monitor the first link. That is to say, the first monitoring operation uses The first station is in a monitoring state to monitor the channel status of the first link.
  • the first site may also be called a listening site.
  • the first link is a link that sends the multicast frame.
  • the first link is a link in an EMLSR link.
  • S410 is specifically: the access point AP MLD working in the EMLSR mode sends the first information, and the first information is used for the non-access point non-AP MLD to perform the first listening operation, wherein the first information
  • a listening operation is used for the first station (that is, the listening station) on the non-AP MLD to monitor the first link in the EMLSR link, so that the first station can pass the first link, and Multicast frames are received using the first receiving capability.
  • the first link may be a link through which the AP MLD associated with the non-AP MLD sends multicast frames.
  • the access point AP (that is, the affiliated AP) on the AP MLD can send multicast frames through the first link.
  • the non-AP MLD also works in EMLSR mode.
  • both ends of the link in an EMLSR link correspond to the station on the non-AP MLD and the affiliated AP on the AP MLD; the affiliated AP sends multicast frames through the link, and accordingly, the station receives them through the link.
  • Multicast frame That is to say, for an AP, an AP corresponds to a link and also corresponds to a station. The AP sends multicast frames through its corresponding link.
  • the station receives the group through its corresponding link. broadcast frame. That is, sites, links, and APs can correspond to each other one by one.
  • the first receiving capability is greater than or equal to the second receiving capability; the second receiving capability is the receiving capability adopted by the first station when the first MLD performs a second listening operation.
  • the first receiving capability may be greater than the second receiving capability.
  • the first receiving capability is the receiving capability in the EMLSR mode, that is, the first receiving capability is the receiving capability of the first station affiliated to the first MLD in the EMLSR mode.
  • the The second receiving capability is also the receiving capability in the EMLSR mode, that is, the second receiving capability is the receiving capability of the first station affiliated to the first MLD in the EMLSR mode.
  • the first receiving capability includes at least one of the following: a first rate, a first modulation and coding strategy MCS, a first spatial stream SS, and a first bandwidth BW.
  • the second receiving capability includes at least one of the following: a second rate, a second modulation and coding strategy MCS, a second spatial stream SS, and a second bandwidth BW; the second receiving capability is a second The receiving capability of the first station under listening operation.
  • the first rate is greater than or equal to the second rate; the first MCS is greater than or equal to the second MCS; the first SS is greater than or equal to the second SS; the first BW is greater than or equal to the second BW .
  • the solution of this application does not limit the number of parameters included in the first receiving capability (or the second receiving capability).
  • it may be one, two, or more of the above parameters.
  • the parameters included in the first receiving capability and the parameters included in the second receiving capability may be the same or different; the number of parameters included in the first receiving capability may be different from the number of parameters included in the second receiving capability.
  • the number of parameters included in the receiving capability may be the same or different, and this application solution does not limit this.
  • the first receiving capability is greater than the second receiving capability if at least one parameter (at least one of the above parameters) of the first receiving capability is greater than the parameter corresponding to the second receiving capability.
  • the first rate included in the first receiving capability is greater than the second rate included in the second receiving capability.
  • the parameter is equal to the corresponding parameter included in the second receiving capability, and the first receiving capability can also be considered to be greater than or better than the second receiving capability.
  • the first SS included in the first receiving capability is equal to the second SS included in the second receiving capability. At this time, since the first rate included in the first receiving capability is greater than the second rate included in the second receiving capability, Therefore, it can still be considered that the first receiving capability is greater than the second receiving capability.
  • all parameters included in the first receiving capability are greater (or better than) than parameters corresponding to the second receiving capability. This ensures that multicast frames in more scenarios can be received. Specifically, since the first station on the first MLD has the first receiving capability (or has better first receiving capability), even if the initial control frame is not received in advance, such as the MU-RTS trigger Under the premise of frames, it is still possible to receive multicast frames sent with higher capabilities. For example, it is still possible to receive multicast frames sent by the second MLD with higher rates, higher MCS, higher BW, or more SSs. broadcast frame.
  • the first MLD also includes a second station; the first monitoring operation is also used for the second station to monitor the second link in the EMLSR link. (That is, the second site is in a listening state), the second link is a link in the EMLSR link other than the first link; further, the second site also has all Describe the first receiving ability. That is to say, when the first station has the first receiving capability under the first listening operation, the second station on the first MLD may also be in a listening state to receive signals other than the first link. to monitor other links; at this time, the second station may also have the first receiving capability.
  • the first listening operation is also used for the second station to perform the first listening operation.
  • the second link in the EMLSR link performs monitoring, the second site is a site on the first MLD, and the second link is a link in the EMLSR link other than the first link. link; or, in the case where the first multi-link device MLD performs the first listening operation to switch the first multi-link device from the second listening operation to the first listening operation, the first listening operation The operation makes it impossible for the second site to monitor.
  • the first station when the first station has the first receiving capability under the first listening operation, there may be one second station in the awake state on the first MLD, or There are multiple, and this application plan does not limit this.
  • the first station when the first station has the first receiving capability under the first listening operation, all second stations in the awake state on the first MLD can be in the listening state, and all second stations have First receiving ability.
  • the first listening operation (that is, the first listening operation in the EMLSR mode) may specifically refer to: working on the non-AP MLD in the EMLSR mode, with a specific link in the EMLSR link (such as the first The affiliated site (referred to as the listening site, such as the first site) corresponding to the link) can receive multicast frames sent at a higher rate/higher MCS/more SS/higher BW. Further, there are two situations when the non-AP MLD enters the first listening operation in EMLSR mode:
  • the affiliated station Under the first monitoring operation, the affiliated station (such as the first station) can enter the monitoring state corresponding to the frame exchange processing of a specific link (such as the first link) in the EMLSR link; that is, the first monitoring operation Under operation, the frame reception capability (also known as the frame processing capability) of the affiliated station (such as the first station) corresponding to a specific link (such as the first link), and the ability to perform frame exchange processing with the specific link Consistent, that is, it can receive multicast frames sent at a higher rate/higher MCS/more SS/higher BW. Moreover, in this state, other links in the EMLSR link except the specific link (such as the first link) cannot monitor, that is, other links except the specific link cannot send or receive frames.
  • the transceiver capabilities in the EMLSR link (such as the transceiver capabilities of other stations in the EMLSR link) can be merged into the first site by switching and merging links, so that the first site has stronger The first receiving ability.
  • the affiliated site (such as the first site) where the specific link (such as the first link) in the EMLSR mode is located has the ability to receive higher rate/higher MCS/higher BW/higher
  • the ability to send multicast frames from multiple SSs thus keeping all awake affiliated stations (such as the second station) in the listening state in the EMLSR link.
  • the affiliated station in the awake state (such as the second station) may have the same or different receiving capabilities as the first station.
  • This application solution does not limit this, as long as the first station has the ability to receive at a higher rate/higher rate.
  • the ability of multicast frames sent by MCS/higher BW/more SSs all fall within the protection scope of the solution of this application. It can be understood that since link merging is not performed in this case, the receiving capability of the first station at this time may be weaker than the receiving capability after link merging is switched.
  • the second monitoring operation is used for the target site on the first MLD (that is, the affiliated site of the first MLD) to monitor the link corresponding to the target site, wherein:
  • the target station is a station in an awake state on the first MLD, and the target station has the second receiving capability.
  • the second receiving capability includes at least one of the following: performing idle channel assessment CCA, receiving Initial control frame that initiates frame exchange.
  • the second listening operation can cause two or more target sites on the first MLD to Has second receiving capability.
  • the affiliated stations in the awakened state on the first MLD can be in the listening state, and the The affiliated stations in the listening state all have the second receiving capability, for example, have a lower second receiving capability relative to the first receiving capability.
  • the second listening operation (that is, the first listening operation in EMLSR mode) may specifically refer to: on the non-AP MLD working in EMLSR mode, all affiliated stations in the awake state corresponding to the EMLSR link ( That is, the target site), are all in the listening state; wherein, the receiving capability of each site corresponding to the EMLSR link, that is, the second receiving capability, is limited, except for being able to perform CCA or MU-RTS triggering frames In addition to the reception of initial control frames, other types of frames cannot be received correctly due to limitations in rate/MCS/SS/BW and other capabilities.
  • the second MLD sends the multicast frame. Specifically, the second MLD sends the multicast frame on the first link monitored by the first MLD when performing the first listening operation.
  • the multicast frame more specifically, the affiliated AP of the second MLD sends the multicast frame on the first link monitored by the first MLD when performing the first listening operation.
  • the first MLD receives the multicast frame by using the first station that monitors the first link and has the first receiving capability.
  • the multicast frame sent by the second MLD is carried by a physical layer protocol data unit PPDU, and the PPDU includes at least one of the following:
  • Orthogonal frequency division multiplexing OFDM physical layer protocol data unit PPDU OFDM physical layer protocol data unit
  • Non-high throughput non-HT replication DUP PPDU
  • the first MLD receives the multicast frame through the first station employing the first receiving capability.
  • an AP working in EMLSR mode and an affiliated AP of MLD uses at least one of the following parameters to send a PPDU carrying a multicast frame on a specific link (i.e., the first link) in the EMLSR link; accordingly
  • the affiliated site such as the first site with the first receiving capability
  • the specific link i.e. the first link
  • the parameters include: higher rate, higher MCS, more SS and higher BW.
  • the second MLD sends the multicast frame at the following time points, that is, the second MLD sends the multicast frame at the following time points through the attached AP;
  • the specific time points include:
  • Expected multicast frame sending time point here, the expected multicast frame sending time point can be any pre-agreed time point, and this application solution does not limit this.
  • the AP MLD's affiliated AP schedules to send buffered multicast frames at the expected multicast frame sending time point.
  • the time point after sending the transmission traffic indication map DTIM beacon frame that is, the expected multicast frame sending time point is later than the TBTT of sending the DTIM beacon frame.
  • the affiliated AP of the AP MLD is scheduled to send the buffered multicast frame after sending the DTIM beacon frame (beacon); for example, the AP is scheduled to send the buffered multicast frame after each DTIM beacon frame (beacon).
  • the affiliated AP of AP MLD is scheduled to send multicast frames within the broadcast TWT service period SP; for example, an affiliated AP of AP MLD is a TWT scheduling AP (TWT scheduling AP), and the TWT scheduling AP sends DTIM beacon frames at The buffered multicast frame is scheduled to be sent within the broadcast TWT service period SP during the beacon interval.
  • TWT scheduling AP TWT scheduling AP
  • the frame sending time point is later than the TBTT of the non-STBC DTIM beacon frame whose current count value in the FMS counter field of the FMS stream is zero.
  • the buffered multicast frame is scheduled to be sent at a time point after the TBTT of a non-STBC DTIM beacon frame in which the current count value of the FMS counter field of a specific flexible multicast service FMS flow is zero.
  • the expected multicast frame sending time point is within the GCR service period. For example, within the GCR service period, buffered multicast frames are scheduled to be sent.
  • the first information sent by the second MLD and used to cause the first multi-link device MLD to perform the first listening operation can be obtained in the following ways:
  • Method 1 The first information is used by the first MLD to perform the first listening operation at or before the target time. That is, the first MLD can cause the first MLD to perform the first listening operation at or before the target time based on the first information.
  • the first information includes a target time.
  • the first information is used for the first MLD to be executed at or before the target time included in the first information.
  • the first information does not include the target time.
  • the target time is sent to the first MLD in advance by the second MLD, that is, received in advance by the first MLD.
  • the target time is The first information is used for the first MLD to perform the first listening operation at a pre-obtained target time or before the target time.
  • the solution of this application does not limit whether the target time is carried in the first information. As long as the first information can cause the first MLD to perform the first monitoring operation at or before the target time, it falls under the protection of the solution of this application. scope.
  • the first information is used for the first MLD to perform the first listening operation at the target time or before the target time, which may specifically include: the first information is used for the first MLD to perform the first listening operation at the target time or before the target time.
  • the first MLD Before the target time, switch from the second listening operation to the first listening operation, or, in the case of receiving the first information, the first MLD is under the first listening operation. At this time, you only need to continue executing The first monitoring operation is enough.
  • the target time in Method 1 includes a first time point, and the first time point may specifically include at least one of the following:
  • the first MLD performs the first monitoring operation at the expected multicast frame sending time point, or at a time point before the expected multicast frame sending time point; here, the expected multicast frame
  • the sending time point can be any pre-agreed time point, and this application solution does not limit this.
  • the expected transmission traffic indicates the target beacon sending time TBTT of the DTIM beacon frame; here, the expected multicast frame sending time point is later than the TBTT of the DTIM beacon frame.
  • the first MLD performs the first listening operation at the TBTT of the expected DTIM beacon frame, or at a time point before the TBTT of the expected DTIM beacon frame.
  • the first MLD performs the first listening operation at the start time of the broadcast target wake-up time TWT service period SP where the multicast frame is expected to be sent, or at a time point before the start time.
  • the first MLD has a non-STBC DTIM beacon frame whose current count value in the FMS counter field of the specific FMS flow is zero, or a non-STBC DTIM beacon frame whose current count value in the FMS counter field of the specific FMS flow is zero.
  • the first listening operation is performed at a time point before the TBTT of the STBC DTIM beacon frame.
  • the first MLD performs the first listening operation at the starting time of the multicast GCR service period with retry in which the multicast frame is expected to be sent, or at a time point before the starting time.
  • the first time point is determined by the second MLD; further, the first time point is sent by the second MLD to the first MLD in advance; for example, Before step S410, the second MLD sends the first time point to the first MLD to ensure that the first MLD performs the first listening operation in advance before sending the expected multicast frame, so that the first MLD A station monitors the link on the EMLSR link where multicast frames are scheduled to be sent.
  • Method 2 The first information is a DTIM beacon frame, that is, step S410 is specifically: the second MLD sends a DTIM beacon frame, and the DTIM beacon frame is used by the first MLD at or before the target time. Perform the first listening operation.
  • the DTIM beacon frame may include a target time (such as the second time point), that is, carry the target time.
  • the DTIM beacon frame is used for the first MLD
  • the first listening operation is performed before the target time or the target time carried by the DTIM beacon frame.
  • the DTIM beacon frame does not contain the target time, that is, it does not carry the target time; at this time, the target time is sent by the second MLD to the first MLD in advance, that is, the first MLD Received in advance, further, the DTIM beacon frame is used by the first MLD to perform the first listening operation at or before the pre-acquired target time.
  • the solution of this application does not limit whether the target time is carried in the DTIM beacon frame. As long as the DTIM beacon frame can cause the first MLD to perform the first monitoring operation at or before the target time, it falls under the protection of the solution of this application. scope.
  • the target time in the second approach includes a second time point; further, the DTIM beacon frame is used for the first MLD at the second time point or before the second time point, switching from the second monitoring operation to the first monitoring operation.
  • the second time point includes: the expected multicast frame sending time point after the first MLD receives the DTIM beacon frame; here, the DTIM beacon frame is the time point when the first MLD receives the DTIM beacon frame in the second time point. Received during listening operation. That is to say, the expected multicast frame sending time point is after the time point of sending the DTIM beacon frame.
  • the first MLD first receives the DTIM beacon frame, and after receiving the DTIM beacon frame, the expected The first listening operation is performed before the expected multicast frame sending time point after receiving the DTIM beacon frame. It can be understood that the first monitoring operation can be performed at a time point when the first MLD has received the DTIM beacon frame.
  • the AP MLD working in EMLSR mode sends a DTIM beacon frame on a specific link in the EMLSR link (such as the first link); at this time, the non-AP MLD working in EMLSR mode (with The AP MLD association), when preparing to receive multicast frames on this link in the EMLSR link (such as the first link), can first enter the second listening operation before the TBTT of the DTIM beacon frame, and after receiving After the DTIM beacon frame and before the time point at which the expected multicast frame is scheduled to be sent, switch from the second listening operation to the first listening operation, so that the first station of the first MLD monitors the group in the EMLSR link.
  • the link (such as the first link) where the broadcast frame is scheduled to be sent is monitored.
  • the first station has the first receiving capability, thus ensuring that the multicast frame can be received normally.
  • the non-AP MLD associated with the AP MLD switches to the scheduled sending of multicast frames in the EMLSR link after receiving the DTIM beacon frame and before the time point when the multicast frame is sent or before the time point when the multicast frame is sent.
  • the first listening operation of the link (such as the first link).
  • Method 3 The first information is determined based on a first indication; the first indication is used to indicate whether to perform the first listening operation when a multicast frame needs to be received.
  • the first indication is specifically used to instruct to perform the first listening operation when it is necessary to receive a multicast frame, or to indicate that it is not necessary to perform the first listening operation when it is necessary to receive a multicast frame.
  • the first instruction can be expressed in the following two ways, including:
  • the first indication is used to uniformly indicate whether the first MLD corresponding to the access point AP performs the first listening operation when it needs to receive a multicast frame; here, the access point AP is the same as the first MLD.
  • the AP corresponding to the second MLD associated with the MLD; the AP corresponding to the second MLD includes at least one of the following: an affiliated AP of the second MLD, and an AP pointed to by the BSSID in the multi-BSSID set in which the affiliated AP of the second MLD is located.
  • the first MLD corresponding to the access point AP can be specifically: the first MLD corresponding to the first site corresponding to the access point AP; it can be understood that the link, such as the link in the EMLSR link
  • the two ends respectively correspond to the first site on the first MLD and the access point AP corresponding to the second MLD.
  • the site, link and AP can correspond one to one.
  • the access point AP Corresponds to the site, and the site corresponds to the first MLD.
  • the first indication does not carry the target time, for example, does not carry the first time point.
  • the purpose of the first indication is to indicate whether the first listening operation needs to be performed when multicast needs to be received. Based on this, the first time point may be obtained in advance by the first MLD through other methods, and the solution of this application does not specifically limit this. Or, in another case, the first indication not only indicates whether the first listening operation needs to be performed when multicast needs to be received, but can also carry a target time, such as a first time point. In this case, no first listening operation is required. MLD went ahead to get the first time point. In practical applications, the above two methods can be implemented alternatively, and this application plan is not limited.
  • the value of the first indication is a first value (for example, 1)
  • it is used to uniformly indicate that the first MLD corresponding to the access point AP needs to receive a multicast frame. Perform the first monitoring operation;
  • the value of the first indication is a second value (for example, 0)
  • it is used to uniformly indicate that the first MLD corresponding to the access point AP does not need to execute the first MLD when it needs to receive a multicast frame. A listening operation.
  • the first indication is carried by an EMLSR operation indication element. Further, the first indication is carried by a first field in the EMLSR operation indication element.
  • the first field includes a second indication; when the value of the second indication is a third value (for example, 1), the first field includes the first indication.
  • the first field is an EMLSR operation indication bitmap control.
  • the first instruction is an EMLSR operation unified instruction.
  • the second indication is the existence of a unified EMLSR operation indication; wherein the existence of the unified EMLSR operation indication is used to indicate whether the first field (that is, the EMLSR operation indication bitmap control) includes an EMLSR operation unified indication.
  • EMLSR operation indication element may also include other fields, and the solution of this application does not specifically limit the fields included.
  • the EMLSR operation indication element is carried by a management frame.
  • the first information may be specifically a management frame.
  • the first MLD receives the management frame. Specifically, before S310, the first MLD receives the management frame.
  • the first MLD receives the management frame sent by the second MLD, so as to facilitate performing the first monitoring operation based on the management frame; here, in an example, the management frame includes a traffic indication map TIM beacon frame.
  • the position of each bit in the first indication is used to indicate the access point AP;
  • each bit in the first indication is used to indicate whether the first MLD corresponding to the access point AP performs the first listening operation when it needs to receive a multicast frame.
  • the access point AP is an AP corresponding to the second MLD associated with the first MLD; the AP corresponding to the second MLD includes at least one of the following: an affiliated AP of the second MLD, the second MLD The AP pointed to by the BSSID in the multi-BSSID set where the MLD's affiliated AP is located.
  • the first MLD corresponding to the access point AP can be specifically: the first MLD corresponding to the first site corresponding to the access point AP; it can be understood that the link, such as the link in the EMLSR link
  • the two ends respectively correspond to the first site on the first MLD and the access point AP corresponding to the second MLD.
  • the site, link and AP can correspond one to one.
  • the access point AP Corresponds to the site, and the site corresponds to the first MLD.
  • the first indication does not carry the target time, for example, does not carry the first time point.
  • the purpose of the first indication is to indicate whether the first listening operation needs to be performed when multicast needs to be received. Based on this, the first time point may be obtained in advance by the first MLD through other methods, and the solution of this application does not specifically limit this. Or, in another case, the first indication not only indicates whether the first listening operation needs to be performed when multicast needs to be received, but can also carry a target time, such as a first time point. In this case, no first listening operation is required. MLD went ahead to get the first time point. In practical applications, the above two methods can be implemented alternatively, and this application plan is not limited.
  • each bit in the first indication when the value of each bit in the first indication is a fourth value (such as 1), it is used to indicate that the first MLD corresponding to the access point AP needs to receive the multicast frame. In this case, perform the first monitoring operation;
  • each bit in the first indication is a fifth value (such as 0)
  • it is used to indicate that the first MLD corresponding to the access point AP does not need to perform all the steps when it needs to receive a multicast frame. Describe the first monitoring operation.
  • the first indication is carried by an EMLSR operation indication element. Further, the first indication is carried by a second field in the EMLSR operation indication element.
  • the second field is a partial EMLSR operation indication bitmap; the partial EMLSR operation indication bitmap is formed by intercepting some consecutive bits in the EMLSR operation indication bitmap.
  • the EMLSR operation indication element includes a first field; wherein, when the value of the second indication in the first field is a sixth value (such as 0), the first The field includes a third indication; the third indication is used to indicate the position of some consecutive bits intercepted from the EMLSR operation indication bitmap.
  • the third indication is a bitmap offset. In this way, the partial EMLSR operation indication bitmap can be intercepted from the EMLSR operation indication bitmap based on the bitmap offset. .
  • the first field is an EMLSR operation indication bitmap control.
  • the first instruction is an EMLSR operation unified instruction.
  • the second indication is the existence of a unified EMLSR operation indication; wherein the existence of the unified EMLSR operation indication is used to indicate whether the first field (that is, the EMLSR operation indication bitmap control) includes an EMLSR operation unified indication.
  • the EMLSR operation indication bitmap control includes the EMLSR operation unified indication.
  • it may also include a predetermined Keep.
  • the EMLSR operation unified indication is used to uniformly indicate whether the corresponding first MLD needs to perform the first listening operation.
  • the EMLSR operation uniformly indicates that the existing value is a sixth value (for example, 0)
  • the EMLSR operation indicates that the bitmap control includes the bitmap offset.
  • the EMLSR operation indication element also needs to include a part of the EMLSR operation indication bitmap, and then use the part of the EMLSR operation indication bitmap to indicate whether the corresponding first MLD needs to perform the first listening operation.
  • EMLSR operation indication element may also include other fields, and the solution of this application does not specifically limit the fields included.
  • the EMLSR operation indication element is carried by a management frame.
  • the first information may be specifically a management frame.
  • the first MLD receives the management frame. Specifically, before S310, the first MLD receives the management frame.
  • the first MLD receives the management frame sent by the second MLD, so as to facilitate performing the first monitoring operation based on the management frame; here, in an example, the management frame may also specifically include traffic Indicates the TIM beacon frame.
  • the first information is a target initial control frame, used to inform that the multicast frame is to be sent after the target initial control frame.
  • the target initial control frame does not require a reply.
  • the target initial control frame is sent by the second MLD when the first MLD is required to perform the first listening operation.
  • the second MLD is associated with the first MLD. MLD.
  • the second MLD when the second MLD expects to use a higher rate/higher MCS/more SS/higher BW to send multicast frames, it can send the target initial control frame to the first MLD in advance to inform the target of the The multicast frame is sent after the initial control frame, causing the first MLD to perform a first listening operation in order to normally receive the multicast frame sent using a higher rate/higher MCS/more SS/higher BW.
  • the first multi-link device MLD performs a first listening operation, specifically: the first MLD switches from a second listening operation to the first listening operation, and more specifically, the first MLD switches to the first listening operation.
  • An MLD switches from the second listening operation to the first listening operation after receiving the target initial control frame; or, in another case, the first MLD currently (i.e., receives the target initial control frame) (or before the control frame) is under the first monitoring operation.
  • the first MLD currently (i.e., receives the target initial control frame) (or before the control frame) is under the first monitoring operation.
  • there is no need to switch and it is only necessary to continue to maintain the first monitoring operation, that is, to continue to perform the first monitoring operation. In this way, multicast frames sent using a higher rate/higher MCS/more SS/higher BW are normally received.
  • the target initial control frame includes an indication duration
  • the indication duration is the maximum available duration for the first MLD to switch to the first listening operation.
  • the second MLD sends the target initial control frame, so that the first MLD switches to the first MLD within the maximum available time when switching is required.
  • the listening operation facilitates the first MLD to receive multicast frames normally.
  • the target initial control frame is a variant of a multi-user request to send MU-RTS trigger frame. Further, the value of the trigger type subfield of the MU-RTS trigger frame of the variant is different from the value of the trigger type subfield of the MU-RTS trigger frame.
  • the target initial control frame such as a variant MU-RTS trigger frame
  • the target initial control frame is used to inform that a multicast frame is sent after the MU-RTS trigger frame.
  • the purpose of the variant MU-RTS trigger frame is to inform the first MLD to send a multicast frame after the MU-RTS trigger frame, and the multicast frame sent adopts a higher rate/ Higher MCS/more SS/higher BW. Therefore, after receiving the MU-RTS trigger frame of the variant, the first MLD does not need to reply. It only needs to respond within the indicated duration carried by the MU-RTS trigger frame of the variant.
  • the first MLD is in the first monitoring operation when it receives the variant MU-RTS trigger frame. At this time, there is no need to reply and it only needs to continue to execute the first monitoring operation. Just monitor the operation.
  • an AP MLD working in EMLSR mode when an AP MLD working in EMLSR mode is expected to use a higher rate/higher MCS/more SS/higher BW to send a multicast frame, it can pre-send the multicast frame without reply before sending the multicast frame.
  • Target initial control frame such as a variant MU-RTS trigger frame, to inform (such as informing the non-AP MLD associated with the AP MLD working in EMLSR mode that the non-AP MLD also works in EMLSR mode)
  • the multicast frame is sent after the target initial control frame, and the multicast frame sent adopts a higher rate/higher MCS/more SS/higher BW; at the same time, the target initial control frame can carry the specified padding (bit Filling) duration (that is, indicating duration) to ensure that the non-AP MLD working in EMLSR mode is on a specific link in the EMLSR link (that is, the link that sends multicast frames, such as the first link) There is enough time to switch to the first listening operation in advance to facilitate normal reception of multicast frames.
  • bit Filling that is, indicating duration
  • the first multi-link device 500 includes:
  • the processing unit 510 is configured to perform a first listening operation, where the first listening operation is used for the first station on the first MLD to receive the multicast frame using the first receiving capability.
  • the first receiving capability is greater than or equal to the second receiving capability
  • the second receiving capability is the receiving capability adopted by the first station when the first MLD performs a second listening operation.
  • the processing unit is specifically configured to perform a first listening operation based on the first information.
  • the first information is used for the first MLD to perform the first listening operation at or before the target time.
  • the target time includes a first time point
  • the first time point includes at least one of the following:
  • the expected transmission traffic indicates the target beacon transmission time TBTT of the DTIM beacon frame
  • the broadcast target wake-up time TWT of the multicast frame expected to be sent is the starting time of the service period SP;
  • the starting time of the multicast GCR service period with retry in which multicast frames are expected to be sent is the starting time of the multicast GCR service period with retry in which multicast frames are expected to be sent.
  • the first time point is received by the first MLD in advance.
  • the first information is a transmission traffic indication map DTIM beacon frame
  • the DTIM beacon frame is used for the first MLD to perform the first listening operation at or before the target time.
  • the target time includes a second time point
  • the second time point includes: the expected multicast frame sending time point after receiving the transmission traffic indication map DTIM beacon frame; the DTIM signal The target frame is received by the first MLD under the second listening operation.
  • the processing unit 510 is specifically configured to switch from the second monitoring operation to the first monitoring operation at or before the second time point; the second monitoring operation The operation is performed by the first MLD before the target beacon transmission time TBTT of the DTIM beacon frame expected to be transmitted.
  • the first information is determined based on a first indication; the first indication is used to indicate whether to perform the first listening operation when a multicast frame needs to be received.
  • the first indication is used to uniformly instruct the first MLD corresponding to the access point AP whether to perform the first listening operation when it needs to receive a multicast frame;
  • the access point AP is an AP corresponding to the second MLD associated with the first MLD; the AP corresponding to the second MLD includes at least one of the following:
  • the attached AP of the second MLD is the AP pointed to by the BSSID in the multi-BSSID set in which the attached AP of the second MLD is located.
  • the value of the first indication when the value of the first indication is the first value, it is used to uniformly instruct the first MLD corresponding to the access point AP to perform the first step when it needs to receive a multicast frame. Monitoring operations;
  • the value of the first indication is the second value, it is used to uniformly indicate that the first MLD corresponding to the access point AP does not need to perform the first monitoring operation when it needs to receive a multicast frame.
  • the first indication is carried by an EMLSR operation indication element.
  • the first indication is carried by a first field in the EMLSR operation indication element.
  • the first field includes a second indication
  • the first field includes the first indication.
  • the first indication is an EMLSR operation unified indication.
  • the position of each bit in the first indication is used to indicate an access point AP;
  • the access point AP is an AP corresponding to the second MLD associated with the first MLD;
  • the AP corresponding to the second MLD includes at least one of the following: an affiliated AP of the second MLD, an AP pointed to by the BSSID in the multi-BSSID set in which the affiliated AP of the second MLD is located;
  • each bit in the first indication is used to indicate whether the first MLD corresponding to the access point AP performs the first listening operation when it needs to receive a multicast frame.
  • each bit in the first indication when the value of each bit in the first indication is a fourth value, it is used to instruct the first MLD corresponding to the access point AP to perform all the steps when it needs to receive a multicast frame.
  • the first monitoring operation is described above;
  • each bit in the first indication when the value of each bit in the first indication is the fifth value, it is used to indicate that the first MLD corresponding to the access point AP does not need to perform the first monitoring when it needs to receive a multicast frame. operate.
  • the first indication is carried by an EMLSR operation indication element.
  • the first indication is carried by a second field in the EMLSR operation indication element.
  • the second field is a partial EMLSR operation indication bitmap; the partial EMLSR operation indication bitmap is formed by intercepting some consecutive bits in the EMLSR operation indication bitmap.
  • the EMLSR operation indication element includes a first field
  • the first field includes a third indication; the third indication is used to indicate that the value intercepted from the EMLSR operation indication bitmap is The position of some consecutive bits.
  • the third indication is a bitmap offset.
  • the second indication is the existence of a unified EMLSR operation indication; wherein the existence of the unified EMLSR operation indication is used to indicate whether the first field includes a unified EMLSR operation indication.
  • the first field is an EMLSR operation indication bitmap control.
  • the EMLSR operation indication element is carried by a management frame.
  • the management frame includes a traffic indication map TIM beacon frame.
  • it also includes:
  • the first receiving unit is used to receive the management frame.
  • the first information is a target initial control frame, used to inform that the multicast frame is to be sent after the target initial control frame.
  • the target initial control frame includes an indication duration
  • the indication duration is the maximum available duration for the first MLD to switch to the first listening operation.
  • the target initial control frame is a variant of a multi-user request to send MU-RTS trigger frame.
  • the value of the trigger type subfield of the variant MU-RTS trigger frame is different from the value of the trigger type subfield of the MU-RTS trigger frame.
  • it also includes:
  • the second receiving unit is configured to receive the target initial control frame.
  • the target initial control frame is sent by the second MLD when the first MLD is required to perform the first listening operation.
  • the second MLD is equal to The MLD associated with the first MLD.
  • the processing unit is specifically configured to: switch from the second listening operation to the first listening operation; or, maintain execution of the first listening operation.
  • the first receiving capability includes at least one of the following: a first rate, a first modulation and coding strategy MCS, a first spatial stream SS, and a first bandwidth BW;
  • the second receiving capability includes at least one of the following: a second rate, a second modulation and coding strategy MCS, a second spatial stream SS, and a second bandwidth BW; the second receiving capability is required under the second listening operation.
  • the first rate is greater than or equal to the second rate; the first MCS is greater than or equal to the second MCS; the first SS is greater than or equal to the second SS; the first BW is greater than or equal to the second BW .
  • the second listening operation is used for a target site on the first MLD to monitor a link corresponding to the target site, where the target site is a link on the first MLD.
  • a station in an awake state the target station has the second receiving capability; the second receiving capability includes at least one of the following: performing idle channel assessment CCA and receiving an initial control frame used to initiate frame exchange.
  • it also includes:
  • a third receiving unit configured to receive the multicast frame through the first station using the first receiving capability.
  • the multicast frame received using the first receiving capability is carried by a physical layer protocol data unit PPDU, and the PPDU includes at least one of the following:
  • Orthogonal frequency division multiplexing OFDM physical layer protocol data unit PPDU OFDM physical layer protocol data unit
  • Non-high throughput non-HT replication DUP PPDU
  • it also includes:
  • the processing unit is further configured to switch from the first listening operation to the second listening operation when reception of the multicast frame is completed.
  • the first site is a site corresponding to the first link on the first MLD, and the first site is used to monitor the first link; the first link is The link on which the multicast frame is sent.
  • the first MLD is an MLD operating in an enhanced multi-link single radio EMLSR mode
  • the first link is a link in an EMLSR link.
  • the first MLD is a non-access point non-AP MLD.
  • the first listening operation is also used to
  • the second station monitors a second link in the EMLSR link.
  • the second station is a station on the first MLD.
  • the second link is a second link in the EMLSR link except the first MLD.
  • the first listening operation causes the second The site cannot be monitored.
  • the first multi-link device 500 in the embodiment of the present application can implement the corresponding functions of the first multi-link device in the foregoing method embodiment.
  • each module (sub-module, unit or component, etc.) in the first multi-link device 500 please refer to the corresponding description in the above method embodiment, and will not be described again here.
  • the functions described with respect to each module (sub-module, unit or component, etc.) in the first multi-link device 500 in the embodiment of the application can be implemented by different modules (sub-module, unit or component, etc.), or Can be implemented by the same module (submodule, unit or component, etc.).
  • the second multi-link device 600 includes:
  • Sending unit 610 configured to send first information, the first information is used for the first multi-link device MLD to perform a first listening operation, the first listening operation is used for the first station on the first MLD to adopt The first receiving capability receives multicast frames.
  • the first receiving capability is greater than or equal to the second receiving capability
  • the second receiving capability is the receiving capability adopted by the first station on the first MLD indicated by the second listening operation
  • the second listening operation is a listening operation that the first MLD can perform.
  • the first information is used for the first MLD to perform the first listening operation at or before the target time.
  • the target time includes a first time point
  • the first time point includes at least one of the following:
  • the expected transmission traffic indicates the target beacon transmission time TBTT of the DTIM beacon frame
  • the broadcast target wake-up time TWT of the multicast frame expected to be sent is the starting time of the service period SP;
  • the starting time of the multicast GCR service period with retry in which multicast frames are expected to be sent is the starting time of the multicast GCR service period with retry in which multicast frames are expected to be sent.
  • the first time point is determined by the second MLD.
  • the first information is a transmission traffic indication map DTIM beacon frame
  • the DTIM beacon frame is used for the first MLD to perform the first listening operation at or before the target time.
  • the target time includes a second time point
  • the second time point includes: the expected multicast frame sending time point after the first MLD receives the DTIM beacon frame; the DTIM The beacon frame is received by the first MLD under the second listening operation.
  • the DTIM beacon frame is used for the first MLD to switch from the second listening operation to the first listening operation at or before the second time point.
  • the first information is determined based on a first indication; the first indication is used to indicate whether to perform the first listening operation when a multicast frame needs to be received.
  • the first indication is used to uniformly instruct the first MLD corresponding to the access point AP whether to perform the first listening operation when it needs to receive a multicast frame;
  • the access point AP is an AP corresponding to the second MLD associated with the first MLD; the AP corresponding to the second MLD includes at least one of the following:
  • the attached AP of the second MLD is the AP pointed to by the BSSID in the multi-BSSID set in which the attached AP of the second MLD is located.
  • the value of the first indication when the value of the first indication is the first value, it is used to uniformly instruct the first MLD corresponding to the access point AP to perform the first step when it needs to receive a multicast frame. Monitoring operations;
  • the value of the first indication is the second value, it is used to uniformly indicate that the first MLD corresponding to the access point AP does not need to perform the first monitoring operation when it needs to receive a multicast frame.
  • the first indication is carried by an EMLSR operation indication element.
  • the first indication is carried by a first field in the EMLSR operation indication element.
  • the first field includes a second indication
  • the first field includes the first indication.
  • the first indication is an EMLSR operation unified indication.
  • the position of each bit in the first indication is used to indicate an access point AP;
  • the access point AP is an AP corresponding to the second MLD associated with the first MLD;
  • the AP corresponding to the second MLD includes at least one of the following: an affiliated AP of the second MLD, an AP pointed to by the BSSID in the multi-BSSID set in which the affiliated AP of the second MLD is located;
  • each bit in the first indication is used to indicate whether the first MLD corresponding to the access point AP performs the first listening operation when it needs to receive a multicast frame.
  • each bit in the first indication when the value of each bit in the first indication is a fourth value, it is used to instruct the first MLD corresponding to the access point AP to perform all the steps when it needs to receive a multicast frame.
  • the first monitoring operation is described above;
  • each bit in the first indication when the value of each bit in the first indication is the fifth value, it is used to indicate that the first MLD corresponding to the access point AP does not need to perform the first monitoring when it needs to receive a multicast frame. operate.
  • the first indication is carried by an EMLSR operation indication element.
  • the first indication is carried by a second field in the MLSR operation indication element.
  • the second field is a partial EMLSR operation indication bitmap; the partial EMLSR operation indication bitmap is formed by intercepting some consecutive bits in the EMLSR operation indication bitmap.
  • the MLSR operation indication element includes a first field
  • the first field includes a third indication; the third indication is used to indicate that the value intercepted from the EMLSR operation indication bitmap is The position of some consecutive bits.
  • the third indication is a bitmap offset.
  • the second indication is the existence of a unified EMLSR operation indication; the existence of the unified EMLSR operation indication is used to indicate whether the first field includes a unified EMLSR operation indication.
  • the first field is an EMLSR operation indication bitmap control.
  • the EMLSR operation indication element is carried by a management frame.
  • the management frame includes a traffic indication map TIM beacon frame.
  • the first information is a target initial control frame, used to inform that the multicast frame is to be sent after the target initial control frame.
  • the target initial control frame includes an indication duration
  • the indication duration is the maximum available duration for the first MLD to switch to the first listening operation.
  • the target initial control frame is a variant of a multi-user request to send MU-RTS trigger frame.
  • the value of the trigger type subfield of the variant MU-RTS trigger frame is different from the value of the trigger type subfield of the MU-RTS trigger frame.
  • the first receiving capability includes at least one of the following: a first rate, a first modulation and coding strategy MCS, a first spatial stream SS, and a first bandwidth BW;
  • the second receiving capability includes at least one of the following: a second rate, a second modulation and coding strategy MCS, a second spatial stream SS, and a second bandwidth BW; the second receiving capability is required under the second listening operation.
  • the first rate is greater than or equal to the second rate; the first MCS is greater than or equal to the second MCS; the first SS is greater than or equal to the second SS; the first BW is greater than or equal to the second BW .
  • the second listening operation is used for a target site on the first MLD to monitor a link corresponding to the target site, where the target site is a link on the first MLD.
  • a station in an awake state the target station has the second receiving capability; the second receiving capability includes at least one of the following: performing idle channel assessment CCA and receiving an initial control frame used to initiate frame exchange.
  • the sending unit is also configured to send the multicast frame at the following time points:
  • the multicast frame is carried by a physical layer protocol data unit PPDU, and the PPDU includes at least one of the following:
  • Orthogonal frequency division multiplexing OFDM physical layer protocol data unit PPDU OFDM physical layer protocol data unit
  • Non-high throughput non-HT replication DUP PPDU
  • the first site is a site corresponding to the first link on the first MLD, and the first site is used to monitor the first link; the first link is The link on which the multicast frame is sent.
  • the first MLD and the second MLD are MLDs operating in the enhanced multi-link single radio EMLSR mode, and the first link is a link in the EMLSR link.
  • the second MLD is an access point AP MLD
  • the first MLD is a non-access point non-AP MLD corresponding to the AP MLD.
  • the first listening operation is also used to
  • the second station monitors a second link in the EMLSR link.
  • the second station is a station on the first MLD.
  • the second link is a second link in the EMLSR link except the first MLD.
  • the first listening operation causes the second The site cannot be monitored.
  • the second multi-link device 600 in the embodiment of the present application can implement the corresponding functions of the second multi-link device in the foregoing method embodiment.
  • each module (sub-module, unit or component, etc.) in the second multi-link device 600 please refer to the corresponding description in the above method embodiment, and will not be described again here.
  • the functions described with respect to each module (sub-module, unit or component, etc.) in the second multi-link device 600 in the embodiment of the application can be implemented by different modules (sub-module, unit or component, etc.), or Can be implemented by the same module (submodule, unit or component, etc.).
  • This application solution is mainly aimed at non-AP MLD stations on the EMLSR link in EMLSR mode (also called stations corresponding to the EMLSR link). Without receiving the MU-RTS trigger frame in advance, it can directly receive higher Possible frame processing problems in multicast frames with higher order or more SS, etc., define the mechanism for AP MLD that supports EMLSR mode (that is, AP MLD working in EMLSR mode) to send multicast frames, and define the non- The mechanism of AP MLD to receive multicast frames in EMLSR mode; at the same time, the monitoring operation of non-AP MLD on EMLSR links is also extended to meet the reception of multicast frames in special scenarios.
  • the first listening operation that is, the first listening operation in EMLSR mode, specifically refers to: on the non-AP MLD working in EMLSR mode, the attachment corresponding to a specific link (such as the first link) in the EMLSR link.
  • the station (referred to as the listening station, such as the first station) can receive PPDUs sent at a higher rate/higher MCS/more SS/higher BW;
  • the PPDU can be at least one of the following: OFDM PPDU, non-HT DUP PPDU, VHT PPDU, HT PPDU, HE SU PPDU, EHT MU PPDU, including PPDU supported by EHT STA, thus ensuring that the non -AP MLD can correctly receive PPDUs that use at least one of the following parameters and carry multicast frames.
  • the parameters include: higher rate, higher MCS, more SS and higher BW.
  • the affiliated station (such as the first station) can enter the monitoring state corresponding to the frame exchange processing of a specific link (such as the first link) in the EMLSR link; that is, the first monitoring operation
  • the frame reception capability also known as the frame processing capability
  • the affiliated station (such as the first station) corresponding to a specific link (such as the first link)
  • the ability to perform frame exchange processing with the specific link Consistent that is, under the first listening operation
  • the affiliated station corresponding to a specific link can receive multicast frames sent at a higher rate/higher MCS/more SS/higher BW.
  • other links in the EMLSR link except the specific link (such as the first link) cannot monitor, that is, other links except the specific link cannot send or receive frames.
  • the affiliated site (such as the first site) where a specific link (such as the first link) in EMLSR mode is located has the ability to receive higher rate/higher MCS/higher BW/higher The ability to send PPDUs (carrying multicast frames) from multiple SSs, thus keeping all awake affiliated stations (such as the second station) in the listening state in the EMLSR link.
  • the second listening operation in EMLSR mode that is, the second listening operation in which the non-AP MLD enters EMLSR mode, specifically refers to: on the non-AP MLD working in EMLSR mode, corresponding to the EMLSR link All affiliated sites that are in the awake state (which can also be referred to as listening sites, such as target sites) are in the listening state; where the receiving capability of each site corresponding to the EMLSR link (that is, the second receiving capability) is limited , In addition to the reception of initial control frames such as CCA or MU-RTS trigger frames, other types of frames cannot be received correctly due to limitations in rate/MCS/SS/BW and other capabilities.
  • initial control frames such as CCA or MU-RTS trigger frames
  • Method 1 The non-AP MLD working in EMLSR mode performs the first listening operation at the expected multicast frame sending time point, or before the expected multicast frame sending time point, to monitor the location of the EMLSR link where the multicast frame is scheduled to be sent.
  • link that is, the first link
  • a non-AP MLD working in EMLSR mode enters the EMLSR link in advance to schedule the first monitoring operation of the link where the multicast frame is sent before the expected multicast frame transmission time point, that is, performs the first monitoring operation in advance.
  • the monitoring operation is to monitor the link (that is, the first link) where multicast frames are scheduled to be sent in the EMLSR link.
  • the non-AP MLD working in EMLSR mode when performing the first listening operation, can receive multicast frames through the first link, and after confirming receipt of the multicast frames, switch to Second monitoring operation. That is to say, when the non-AP MLD is associated with an AP MLD that supports EMLSR mode, and the non-AP MLD operates in EMLSR mode on the EMLSR link, if the multicast frame will be scheduled to be transmitted on the non-AP
  • the site on one of the EMLSR links corresponding to the MLD for example, the first link
  • the non-AP MLD is on this link (for example, the first link) (set to site A, that is, the first site)
  • site A can monitor the link (that is, the first link) that transmits the multicast frame. channel) to listen so that multicast frames can be received correctly.
  • the method for the AP MLD's affiliated AP to schedule the sending of the buffered multicast frame can adopt at least one of the following:
  • the affiliated AP of AP MLD schedules and sends buffered multicast frames at the expected multicast frame sending time point; here, the expected multicast frame sending time point can be any pre-agreed time point.
  • This application solution is suitable for This is not a restriction.
  • the affiliated AP of the AP MLD schedules to send buffered multicast frames after sending DTIM beacon frames (beacon); for example, schedules to send buffered multicast frames after each DTIM beacon frame (beacon).
  • the affiliated AP of AP MLD schedules to send multicast frames within the broadcast TWT service period SP; for example, an affiliated AP of AP MLD is a TWT scheduling AP, and the TWT scheduling AP is located in the beacon interval ( The buffered multicast frame is scheduled to be sent within the broadcast TWT service period SP during beacon interval).
  • the expected multicast frame sending time point can be any pre-agreed time point, or can be obtained based on the following method:
  • the expected transmission traffic indicates the target beacon sending time TBTT of the DTIM beacon frame; at this time, the expected multicast frame sending time point is later than the TBTT of the DTIM beacon frame.
  • the non-AP MLD performs the first listening operation at the TBTT of the expected DTIM beacon frame, or at a time point before the TBTT of the expected DTIM beacon frame.
  • the non-AP MLD performs the first listening operation at the starting time of the broadcast target wake-up time TWT service period SP where the multicast frame is expected to be sent, or at a time point before the starting time.
  • the current count value of the FMS counter field of the specific flexible multicast service FMS flow is the TBTT of the non-STBC DTIM beacon frame whose current count value is zero; at this time, the expected multicast frame transmission time point is later than The TBTT of the non-STBC DTIM beacon frame in which the current count value of the FMS counter field of the FMS flow is zero.
  • the non-AP MLD has a non-STBC DTIM beacon frame whose current count value in the FMS counter field of the specific FMS flow is zero, or a non-STBC DTIM beacon frame whose current count value in the FMS counter field of the specific FMS flow is zero.
  • the first listening operation is performed at a time point before the TBTT of the STBC DTIM beacon frame.
  • the non-AP MLD performs the first listening operation at the starting time of the multicast GCR service period with retry in which the multicast frame is expected to be sent, or at a time point before the starting time.
  • the non-AP MLD when the AP MLD schedules to send buffered multicast frames after the DTIM beacon frame through a link in the EMLSR link (such as the first link), the non-AP MLD working in EMLSR mode, It will first enter the first monitoring operation of the link where the multicast frame is scheduled to be sent (such as the first link) at or before the expected DTIM beacon frame TBTT, that is, the first monitoring operation will be performed at or before the expected DTIM beacon frame TBTT. Operation to monitor the link where the multicast frame is scheduled to be sent (that is, the first link).
  • the non-AP MLD working in EMLSR mode after receiving the DTIM beacon frame, maintains the first monitoring operation (that is, maintaining frame exchange) for the link (such as the first link) where the multicast frame is scheduled to be sent. operation state), that is, the first monitoring operation is maintained to maintain monitoring of the link (such as the first link) where the multicast frame is scheduled to be sent until the reception of the multicast frame is completed.
  • the non-AP MLD receives an indication, for example, if the More Data subfield of the multicast frame sent by the AP on the first link is 0, it confirms that there are no more multicast frames. , return from the first listening operation (also called frame exchange operation) to the second listening operation in the EMLSR mode.
  • the non-AP MLD working in EMLSR mode will first send the multicast frame in the expected scheduled broadcast. On or before the start time of the TWT service period or GCR service period, enter the first listening operation in advance on the link where the multicast frame is scheduled to be sent (such as the first link), that is, enter the first listening operation in advance to monitor the multicast The link where the frame is scheduled to be sent (such as the first link) is monitored.
  • the non-AP MLD working in EMLSR mode after receiving the DTIM beacon frame, maintains the first monitoring operation (that is, maintaining frame exchange) for the link (such as the first link) where the multicast frame is scheduled to be sent.
  • operation state that is, the first monitoring operation is maintained to maintain monitoring of the link (such as the first link) where the multicast frame is scheduled to be sent until the reception of the multicast frame is completed.
  • the non-AP MLD when the non-AP MLD receives the instruction to confirm that there is no multicast frame (that is, it has received the multicast frame), the non-AP MLD returns to the EMLSR mode from the first listening operation (that is, the frame exchange operation) The second listening operation; or, when the end time point of the broadcast TWT service period or GCR service period (SP) is reached and there is no multicast frame being received, the first listening operation returns to the EMLSR mode. Second monitoring operation.
  • Non-AP MLD working in EMLSR mode when preparing to receive multicast frames on one of the EMLSR links, can first enter the second listening operation before the TBTT of the DTIM beacon frame, and then receive After completing the DTIM beacon frame and before the time point at which the expected multicast frame is scheduled to be sent, switch from the second listening operation to the first listening operation, so that the first station of the first MLD responds to the EMLSR link.
  • the link where the multicast frame is scheduled to be sent (such as the first link) is monitored and the multicast frame is received through this link until the reception of the multicast frame is completed.
  • the non-AP MLD receives an indication to confirm that there are no more groups. When the frame is broadcast, it can be considered that the reception is completed, and then the first listening operation (that is, the frame exchange operation) returns to the second listening operation.
  • the non-AP MLD associated with the AP MLD after receiving the DTIM beacon frame and before the time point of sending the multicast frame, switches to the link where the multicast frame is scheduled to be sent in the EMLSR link (such as the first link path) first listening operation.
  • the non-AP MLD when the non-AP MLD receives an indication, for example, if the More Data subfield of the multicast frame sent by the AP on the first link is 0, it confirms that there are no more multicast frames. , return from the first listening operation (also called frame exchange operation) to the second listening operation in the EMLSR mode.
  • first listening operation also called frame exchange operation
  • Method 3 AP MLD sends a management frame (such as a TIM beacon frame) carrying an EMLSR operation indication element.
  • the EMLSR operation indication element can indicate when the AP has a multicast frame buffer (that is, the station corresponding to the AP needs to receive multicast frames). ), does the non-AP MLD corresponding to the AP working in EMLSR mode (associated with the AP MLD corresponding to the AP) need to perform a higher rate/higher MCS/more SS/higher BW? receiving capability (that is, the first receiving capability), and is in the first listening operation on the link where the AP is located (such as the first link).
  • the non-AP MLD working in EMLSR mode after obtaining the EMLSR operation indication element, when intending to receive the multicast frame (that is, it needs to be received), determines whether to execute it in advance according to the value meaning of the EMLSR operation indication element.
  • the first listening operation for example, determines whether to perform the first listening operation at or before the expected multicast frame sending time point.
  • the non-AP MLD when the non-AP MLD receives an indication, for example, if the More Data subfield of the multicast frame sent by the AP on the first link is 0, it confirms that there are no more multicast frames. , return from the first listening operation (also called frame exchange operation) to the second listening operation in the EMLSR mode.
  • first listening operation also called frame exchange operation
  • Method 4 AP MLD working in EMLSR mode, when it is expected to use a higher rate/higher MCS/more SS/higher BW to send multicast frames, it can pre-send the multicast frame without reply before sending the multicast frame.
  • Target initial control frame such as a variant MU-RTS trigger frame, to inform (such as informing the non-AP MLD associated with the AP MLD working in EMLSR mode that the non-AP MLD also works in EMLSR mode) in The multicast frame is sent after the target initial control frame, and the multicast frame sent uses a higher rate/higher MCS/more SS/higher BW; at the same time, the target initial control frame can be carried by the specified padding (bit padding) ) duration (that is, the indication duration), to ensure that the non-AP MLD working in EMLSR mode is on a specific link in the EMLSR link (that is, the link that sends multicast frames, such as the first link) There is enough time to switch to the first listening operation in advance to
  • the non-AP MLD when the non-AP MLD receives an indication, for example, if the More Data subfield of the multicast frame sent by the AP on the first link is 0, it confirms that there are no more multicast frames. , return from the first listening operation (also called frame exchange operation) to the second listening operation in the EMLSR mode.
  • first listening operation also called frame exchange operation
  • Figure 7(A) is a schematic diagram 1 of the implementation flow of the communication method in a specific example according to the embodiment of the present application; as shown in Figure 7(A), the non-AP MLD enters the first listening operation before the TBTT of the DTIM beacon frame. ,specifically:
  • the non-AP MLD is associated with the AP MLD after going through the multi-link establishment process.
  • the two associated links are Link 1 (Link1) and Link 2 (Link2).
  • Link1 Link 1
  • Link 2 Link 2
  • the two ends of Link1 are AP1 affiliated with AP MLD and site 1 (STA1) of non-AP MLD, that is, the corresponding link between AP1 and STA1 is Link1.
  • Link2 The two ends of Link2 are AP MLD's affiliated AP2 and non-AP MLD's site 2 (STA2). That is, the links corresponding to AP2 and STA3 are Link2.
  • AP MLD supports EMLSR mode
  • non-AP MLD operates in EMLSR mode on EMLSR links (such as Link1 and Link2).
  • the non-AP MLD working in EMLSR mode first enter the first listening operation of the link (that is, Link1) where the multicast frame is scheduled to be sent before the TBTT of the expected DTIM beacon frame, so that the STA1 has a strong first receiving capability, and the STA1 Monitor Link1; after receiving the DTIM beacon frame, the non-AP MLD working in EMLSR mode maintains the first monitoring operation of the link (i.e. Link1) where the multicast frame is scheduled to be sent (also known as maintaining frame exchange). operation) until the reception of the multicast frame is completed; here, the AP MLD sends the multicast frame on Link1 through AP1.
  • the non-AP MLD when the non-AP MLD receives the instruction to confirm that there are no more multicast frames, it switches from the first listening operation to the second listening operation of Link1 and Link2 in EMLSR mode after the EMLSR conversion delay.
  • the first listening operation that is, the first listening operation in EMLSR mode, the non-AP MLD working in EMLSR mode, the STA1 corresponding to the specific link in the EMLSR link (Link1 in this example)
  • the first listening operation can receive PPDUs carrying multicast frames sent using a higher rate/higher MCS/more SS/higher BW.
  • the non-AP MLD enters the first listening operation of a specific link (Link1 in this example) in EMLSR mode.
  • Link1 in this example
  • the affiliated site (STA1 in this example) where a specific link (in this example is Link1) is located has the ability to receive higher rate/higher MCS/more SS/higher BW transmissions
  • the ability of PPDU therefore, can keep all affiliated stations in the awake state (such as STA2) in the EMLSR link in the listening state.
  • the auxiliary station in the awake state (such as STA2) can have the same or different receiving capabilities as STA1.
  • This application solution does not limit this, as long as STA1 has the ability to receive higher rate/higher MCS/higher BW/
  • the ability to send multicast frames from multiple SSs falls within the protection scope of the solution of this application.
  • the second listening operation in EMLSR mode refers to: non-AP MLD working in EMLSR mode, all affiliated sites (awake state) in the EMLSR link (referred to as listening sites, such as Link1 and Link2) are in Monitoring state; among them, the monitoring operation capability of each station in the EMLSR link, such as Link1 and Link2, is limited.
  • listening sites such as Link1 and Link2
  • Monitoring state the monitoring operation capability of each station in the EMLSR link, such as Link1 and Link2
  • initial control frames such as CCA and MU-RTS
  • other types of frames are limited due to Depending on the speed/MCS/SS/BW capabilities, it may not be received correctly.
  • the EMLSR first conversion delay refers to the conversion of the non-AP MLD operating in EMLSR mode from the first listening operation in the EMLSR link to the second listening operation on the EMLSR link (including multiple links). duration.
  • Figure 7(B) is a schematic diagram 2 of the implementation process of the communication method in a specific example according to the embodiment of the present application; as shown in Figure 7(B), after receiving the DTIM beacon frame and scheduling the non-AP MLD to send The first listening operation is performed before the multicast frame, specifically:
  • the non-AP MLD is associated with the AP MLD after going through the multi-link establishment process.
  • the two associated links are Link 1 (Link1) and Link 2 (Link2).
  • Link1 the two ends of Link1 are AP1 affiliated with AP MLD and site 1 (STA1) of non-AP MLD, that is, the corresponding link between AP1 and STA1 is Link1.
  • STA1 site 1 of non-AP MLD
  • the two ends of Link2 are AP MLD's affiliated AP2 and non-AP MLD's site 2 (STA2). That is, the links corresponding to AP2 and STA3 are Link2.
  • AP MLD supports EMLSR mode
  • non-AP MLD operates in EMLSR mode on EMLSR links (such as Link1 and Link2).
  • the switch enters the first listening operation of the link where the multicast frame is scheduled to be sent (in this example, Link1) in the EMLSR link.
  • the second conversion delay refers to the conversion time for the non-AP MLD operating in the EMLSR mode to switch from the second listening operation to the first listening operation in the EMLSR link.
  • non-AP MLD operating in EMLSR mode, when the buffered multicast frame is scheduled to be sent after the DTIM beacon frame on Link1, first enters the EMLSR link at or before the TBTT of the expected DTIM beacon frame.
  • the second listening operation of the multi-link i.e. Link1 and Link2
  • the first listening operation is to receive multicast frames on Link1 until the reception of multicast frames is completed.
  • the non-AP MLD receives the instruction to confirm that there are no more multicast frames, it switches from the first listening operation to the second listening operation of the multi-link (Link1 and Link2) in EMLSR mode after the first EMLSR conversion delay. operate.
  • the first monitoring operation, the second monitoring operation and the EMLSR first conversion delay may refer to the foregoing description, and will not be described again here.
  • Figure 7(C) is a schematic diagram 3 of the implementation process of the communication method in a specific example according to the embodiment of the present application; as shown in Figure 7(C), the non-AP MLD enters before/when the broadcast TWT service cycle start time point
  • the first listening operation specifically:
  • the non-AP MLD is associated with the AP MLD after going through the multi-link establishment process.
  • the two associated links are Link 1 (Link1) and Link 2 (Link2).
  • Link1 the two ends of Link1 are AP1 affiliated with AP MLD and site 1 (STA1) of non-AP MLD, that is, the corresponding link between AP1 and STA1 is Link1.
  • STA1 site 1 of non-AP MLD
  • the two ends of Link2 are AP MLD's affiliated AP2 and non-AP MLD's site 2 (STA2). That is, the links corresponding to AP2 and STA3 are Link2.
  • AP MLD supports EMLSR mode
  • non-AP MLD operates in EMLSR mode on EMLSR links (such as Link1 and Link2).
  • a broadcast TWT is established between a station on the EMLSR link such as STA1 on the non-AP MLD and the AP associated with the AP MLD such as AP1, and STA1 is the scheduled station for the broadcast TWT service cycle.
  • AP1 is within the broadcast TWT service cycle. Schedules the sending of buffered multicast frames.
  • MLD first enters the first listening operation of the link (i.e. Link1) where the multicast frame is scheduled to be sent before/at the start time of the broadcast TWT service cycle; then, maintains the first listening operation during the broadcast TWT service cycle, and Receive multicast frames until the reception of multicast frames is completed.
  • the non-AP MLD when the non-AP MLD receives the instruction to confirm that there are no more multicast frames or reaches the end time point of the broadcast TWT service cycle, the non-AP MLD switches to multi-link in the EMLSR mode after the EMLSR first conversion delay.
  • the second listening operation of the link i.e. Link1 and Link2.
  • the first monitoring operation, the second monitoring operation and the EMLSR first conversion delay may refer to the foregoing description, and will not be described again here.
  • Figure 7(D) is a schematic diagram 4 of the implementation process of the communication method in a specific example according to the embodiment of the present application; as shown in Figure 7(D), the non-AP MLD is based on the EMLSR operation indication element, and after the DTIM beacon frame Enter the first monitoring operation.
  • the EMLSR operation indication elements include element identification (Element ID), length (Length), and element identification extension (Element ID Extension); here, the element identification, length, and element identification extension all occupy 1 Bytes, the specific definition can be similar to the definition in relevant standards.
  • the EMLSR operation indicator element also includes an EMLSR Operation Indicator Bitmap Control (EMLSR Operation Indicator Bitmap Control), which also occupies 1 byte.
  • the EMLSR operation indication bitmap control includes: EMLSR Operation for ALL Indicator Present (EMLSR Operation for ALL Indicator Present).
  • the EMLSR operation indication bitmap control also includes: EMLSR operation unified indication (EMLSR Operation for ALL Indicator) and reserved (Reserved).
  • EMLSR operation unified indication existence, EMLSR operation unified indication and reservation occupy 1 bit, 1 bit and 6 bits respectively. Based on this, the EMLSR operation unified indication existence, EMLSR operation unified indication and reservation included in the EMLSR operation indication bitmap control occupy one byte in total.
  • the EMLSR operation indication bitmap control when the value of the EMLSR operation unified indication is 0, the EMLSR operation indication bitmap control also includes: bitmap offset (Bitmap Offset).
  • bitmap Offset Bitmap Offset
  • the EMLSR operation uniformly indicates existence and bitmap offset occupy 1 bit and 7 bits respectively. Based on this, the EMLSR operation indication bitmap control included in the EMLSR operation unified indication existence and the bitmap offset occupy one byte.
  • the EMLSR operation unified indication (or EMLSR operation unified indication field) is used to uniformly instruct the AP's corresponding non-AP MLD working in EMLSR mode whether to perform the first listening operation when it needs to receive multicast frames.
  • the first monitoring operation is used on the non-AP MLD, and the first station corresponding to the AP has the first receiving capability, so that the first station monitors the link where the AP is located.
  • the EMLSR operation unified indication is used to uniformly indicate whether the non-AP MLD corresponding to the AP working in the EMLSR mode needs to receive multicast frames with higher rate/higher MCS/more SS/
  • the receiving capability of the higher BW that is, the first receiving capability
  • the first monitoring operation of the link where the AP is located such as the first link
  • the AP is at least one of the following: an affiliated AP of AP MLD, or an AP pointed to by the BSSID in the multiple BSSID set where the affiliated AP of AP MLD is located.
  • the non-AP MLD is associated with the AP MLD.
  • the non-AP MLD corresponding to the AP working in the EMLSR mode can be specifically: the non-AP MLD working in the EMLSR mode corresponding to the site (such as the first site) corresponding to the AP.
  • the non-AP MLD corresponding to AP1 working in EMLSR mode can be specifically the non-AP MLD corresponding to SAT1 corresponding to AP1.
  • the EMLSR operation unified indication value when the EMLSR operation unified indication value is 1, it means that the non-AP MLD corresponding to the AP working in the EMLSR mode performs a higher rate/higher MCS when it needs to receive multicast frames. /More spatial streams (SS)/Higher BW receiving capability (that is, the first receiving capability), and the first listening operation of the link where the AP is located (such as the first link).
  • SS spatial streams
  • Higher BW receiving capability that is, the first receiving capability
  • the first listening operation of the link where the AP is located such as the first link.
  • the EMLSR operation unified indication value is 0, it means that the corresponding non-AP MLD of the AP works in EMLSR mode.
  • SS higher BW receiving capability
  • the first listening operation of the link where the AP is located such as the first link
  • the EMLSR operation unified indication is used to indicate whether to perform the first listening operation when it is necessary to receive a multicast frame.
  • part of the EMLSR operation indication bits contained in the EMLSR operation indication element The number of bytes of the picture is 0; that is, in this method, the structure of the EMLSR operation indication element is as shown in Table 5 and Table 6(B). At this time, the number of bytes of some EMLSR operation indication bitmaps in Table 5 is 0.
  • the EMLSR operation indication element also includes a partial EMLSR operation indication bitmap (Partial EMLSR Operation Indicator Bitmap); different from the first method, in this method, the partial EMLSR operation indication bitmap is used to indicate when needed Whether to perform the first listening operation when receiving a multicast frame. That is, in this method, the structure of the EMLSR operation indication element is as shown in Table 5 and Table 6(A). At this time, the number of bytes of some EMLSR operation indication bitmaps in Table 5 is any value from 1 to 251.
  • bitmap offset can be similar to the definition of the bitmap offset (Bitmap Offset) field of the TIM element in the relevant standard. The difference is that the bitmap offset (Bitmap Offset) field of the TIM element in the relevant standard corresponds to Traffic indication virtual bitmap, and the bitmap offset in this application solution corresponds to the EMLSR operation indication bitmap.
  • the partial EMLSR operation indication bitmap (also called the partial EMLSR operation indication bitmap domain, or field) is formed by intercepting some meaningful continuous bits in the EMLSR operation indication bitmap, and the interception method is consistent with relevant standards.
  • the TIM element in the TIM element forms the partial traffic mark virtual bitmap in the same way.
  • the partial traffic mark virtual bitmap is formed by intercepting bits at partial consecutive positions of the traffic mark virtual bitmap; the difference lies in the different definitions of the bit values between the two.
  • the position of each bit in the EMLSR operation indication bitmap corresponds to the AP.
  • the AP is at least one of the following: the affiliated AP of the AP MLD, and the BSSID of the multi-BSSID set where the affiliated AP of the AP MLD is located.
  • the bit positions in the EMLSR operation indication bitmap are defined, and the correspondence between the AP and the bit positions in the traffic mark virtual bitmap of the TIM element in the relevant standards is defined when there is a multicast frame buffer. consistent.
  • each bit in the EMLSR operation indication bitmap indicates: when the AP corresponding to this bit has a multicast frame cache, whether the AP needs the corresponding non-AP MLD working in the EMLSR mode, and the execution has The receiving capability of higher rate/higher MCS/more SS/higher BW (that is, the first receiving capability), and is in the first listening operation of the link where the AP is located (such as the first link).
  • the value of each bit in the EMLSR operation indication bitmap indicates: The AP corresponding to this bit corresponds to the non-AP MLD working in EMLSR mode.
  • the non-AP MLD corresponding to the AP working in the EMLSR mode can be specifically: the non-AP MLD working in the EMLSR mode corresponding to the site (such as the first site) corresponding to the AP.
  • the non-AP MLD is associated with the AP MLD.
  • the AP when the value of a certain bit in the EMLSR operation indication bitmap is 1, it indicates the AP corresponding to the bit.
  • the AP needs to correspond to the non-AP MLD working in EMLSR mode. Perform the first listening operation that has higher rate/higher MCS/more SS/higher BW receiving capabilities and is on the link where the AP is located;
  • the AP corresponding to the bit has multicast frame buffering. There is no need for the non-AP MLD corresponding to the AP to work in EMLSR mode when executing. Higher rate/higher MCS/more SS/higher BW receiving capabilities, and is in the first listening operation of the link where the AP is located.
  • the EMLSR operation indication element can be carried by a management frame, such as a TIM beacon frame; for example, the EMLSR operation indication element can be added to the frame body of the TIM beacon frame.
  • the TIM beacon frame carries the EMLSR operation indication element, it means that the multicast frame sent by the indicated AP needs to work in the non-AP MLD in EMLSR mode.
  • the EMLSR operation indication When preparing to receive the multicast frame, follow the EMLSR operation indication. The operations indicated in the element are performed so that multicast frames can be received normally.
  • non-AP MLD is based on the EMLSR operation indication element and enters the first listening operation after the DTIM beacon frame, specifically including:
  • the non-AP MLD is associated with the AP MLD after going through the multi-link establishment process.
  • the two associated links are Link 1 (Link1) and Link 2 (Link2).
  • Link1 the two ends of Link1 are AP1 affiliated with AP MLD and site 1 (STA1) of non-AP MLD, that is, the corresponding link between AP1 and STA1 is Link1.
  • STA1 site 1 of non-AP MLD
  • the two ends of Link2 are AP MLD's affiliated AP2 and non-AP MLD's site 2 (STA2). That is, the links corresponding to AP2 and STA3 are Link2.
  • AP MLD supports EMLSR mode
  • non-AP MLD operates in EMLSR mode on EMLSR links (such as Link1 and Link2).
  • the first listening operation is the receiving capability of high rate/higher MCS/more SS/higher BW (that is, the first receiving capability) and is on the link where AP1 is located (that is, Link1).
  • the non-AP MLD working in the EMLSR mode first sends the buffered multicast frame before or before the expected DTIM beacon frame TBTT. Enter the first listening operation of the link where the multicast frame is scheduled to be sent (i.e. Link1). Then, after receiving the DTIM beacon frame, maintain the first listening operation of the link where the multicast frame is scheduled to be sent (i.e. Link1) until it is completed.
  • Reception of multicast frames further, when the non-AP MLD receives the instruction to confirm that there are no more multicast frames, it switches from the first listening operation to multi-link in EMLSR mode after the EMLSR first conversion delay. (Link1 and Link2) second listening operation.
  • the AP MLD affiliated AP1 carries the EMLSR operation indication element in the TIM beacon frame sent, and instructs AP1 that when there is a multicast frame cache, the non-AP MLD working in the EMLSR mode does not need to enter the link where AP1 is located.
  • (Link1) first listening operation.
  • the AP MLD schedules to send the buffered multicast frame after the subsequent DTIM beacon frame through link Link1 in the EMLSR link
  • the non-AP MLD working in the EMLSR mode first sends the buffered multicast frame in the expected DTIM beacon frame.
  • TBTT or the second listening operation of the multi-link (Link1 and Link1), and under the second listening operation, receive the DTIM beacon frame and the multicast frame until the multicast frame is received.
  • the first monitoring operation, the second monitoring operation and the EMLSR first conversion delay may refer to the foregoing description, and will not be described again here.
  • Figure 7(E) is a schematic diagram 5 of the implementation process of the communication method in a specific example according to the embodiment of the present application; as shown in Figure 7(E), the non-AP MLD enters before/when the broadcast TWT service cycle start time point
  • the first listening operation specifically:
  • the non-AP MLD is associated with the AP MLD after going through the multi-link establishment process.
  • the two associated links are Link 1 (Link1) and Link 2 (Link2).
  • Link1 Link 1
  • Link 2 Link 2
  • the two ends of Link1 are AP1 affiliated with AP MLD and site 1 (STA1) of non-AP MLD, that is, the corresponding link between AP1 and STA1 is Link1.
  • Link2 The two ends of Link2 are AP MLD's affiliated AP2 and non-AP MLD's site 2 (STA2). That is, the links corresponding to AP2 and STA3 are Link2.
  • AP MLD supports EMLSR mode
  • non-AP MLD operates in EMLSR mode on EMLSR links (such as Link1 and Link2).
  • a broadcast TWT is established between a site on the EMLSR link such as STA1 on the non-AP MLD and the corresponding (that is, associated) AP such as AP1 on the AP MLD, and STA1 is the scheduled site for the broadcast TWT service cycle.
  • AP1 schedules to send buffered multicast frames within the broadcast TWT service period.
  • the affiliated AP MLD carries the EMLSR operation indication element in the DTIM beacon frame sent.
  • the EMLSR operation indication element instructs AP1 that when there is a multicast frame buffer, it needs to work in the non-AP MLD in the EMLSR mode and enter the non-AP MLD with a higher
  • the first listening operation of high rate/higher MCS/more spatial streams (SS)/higher BW reception capability and on the link where AP1 is located (Link1).
  • the non-AP MLD working in EMLSR mode first enters the first link of the link (i.e. Link1) where the multicast frame is scheduled to be sent before/at the start time of the broadcast TWT service cycle. Listening operation; subsequently, the first listening operation is maintained during the broadcast TWT service period, and reception of multicast frames is performed until reception of multicast frames is completed.
  • the non-AP MLD when the non-AP MLD receives the instruction to confirm that there are no more multicast frames or reaches the end time point of the broadcast TWT service cycle, the non-AP MLD switches to multi-link in the EMLSR mode after the EMLSR first conversion delay.
  • the second monitoring operation of the link (Link1 and Link2).
  • the AP MLD attached to AP1 carries the EMLSR operation indication element in the sent DTIM beacon frame.
  • the EMLSR operation indication element instructs AP1 to work in the EMLSR mode of the non-AP MLD when there is a multicast frame buffer, without entering the The first listening operation of the link where AP1 is located (Link1).
  • the AP MLD when the AP MLD is expected to schedule the transmission of buffered multicast frames during the broadcast TWT service period (the second broadcast TWT service period as shown in Figure 7(E)) through link Link1 in the EMLSR link,
  • the non-AP MLD working in EMLSR mode enters the second listening operation of the multi-link (Link1 and Link1) before/at the start time of the broadcast TWT service cycle, and under the second listening operation, during the broadcast TWT service cycle
  • the multicast frame is received until the reception of the multicast frame is completed.
  • the first monitoring operation, the second monitoring operation and the EMLSR first conversion delay may refer to the foregoing description, and will not be described again here.
  • Figure 7(F) is a schematic diagram 6 of the implementation flow of the communication method in a specific example according to the embodiment of the present application; as shown in Figure 7(F), the non-AP MLD performs the first monitoring based on the variant MU-RTS trigger frame Operation, specifically:
  • Trigger Frame Based on the 802.11be trigger frame (Trigger Frame) format definition, a new variant type of MU-RTS Variant (variant) trigger frame is added, that is, "MU-RTS without allowing to send (Clear To Send, CTS) reply", As shown in Table 7.
  • the MU-RTS Variant trigger frame that is, the variant MU-RTS trigger frame, except that the trigger type subfield value of the trigger frame variant (Trigger frame variant) is different from MU-RTS, other definitions are consistent with MU-RTS .
  • the MU-RTS Variant trigger frame is used to send before sending a specific multicast frame (such as a multicast frame sent with a higher rate/higher MCS/more SS/higher BW) to inform the MU-RTS Variant
  • a specific multicast frame such as a multicast frame sent with a higher rate/higher MCS/more SS/higher BW
  • the multicast frame will be sent after the trigger frame, and appropriate padding time can be added according to the EMLSR conversion delay (for example, the EMLSR second conversion delay when switching from the second listening operation to the first listening operation). Ensure that the non-AP MLD working in EMLSR operation has enough time to switch to the first listening operation in advance on the corresponding link in the EMLSR link in order to receive the specific group sent after the MU-RTS Variant trigger frame. broadcast frame.
  • the non-AP MLD is associated with the AP MLD after a multi-link establishment process, and the two associated links are Link 1 (Link1) and Link 2 (Link2).
  • the two ends of Link1 are AP1 affiliated with AP MLD and site 1 (STA1) of non-AP MLD, that is, the corresponding link between AP1 and STA1 is Link1.
  • the two ends of Link2 are AP MLD's affiliated AP2 and non-AP MLD's site 2 (STA2). That is, the links corresponding to AP2 and STA3 are Link2.
  • AP MLD supports EMLSR mode
  • non-AP MLD operates in EMLSR mode on EMLSR links (such as Link1 and Link2).
  • AP MLD is attached to AP1.
  • the target initial control frame that does not require a reply, such as MU-RTS.
  • Variant triggers the frame to inform the target that the multicast frame after the initial control frame adopts a higher rate/higher MCS/more SS/higher BW.
  • the target initial control frame passes the specified padding (bit filling) duration. , to ensure that the non-AP MLD working in EMLSR mode has enough time to switch to the first listening operation in advance on a specific link in the EMLSR link, so as to receive multicast frames normally.
  • the MU-RTS variant trigger frame is sent first, and then the multicast using higher rate/higher MCS/more SS/higher BW is sent. frame.
  • the non-AP MLD For multicast frame reception after the second DTIM beacon frame in 7(F), the non-AP MLD is scheduled to send the buffered multicast frame after the DTIM beacon frame on Link1 when preparing to receive it.
  • the DTIM beacon frame TBTT enters the second listening operation of the multiple links (Link1 and Link2) on the EMLSR link, and then the DTIM beacon frame and multicast frame are received until the multicast frame is received.
  • the first monitoring operation, the second monitoring operation and the EMLSR first conversion delay may refer to the foregoing description, and will not be described again here.
  • this application plan defines the mechanism for AP MLD that supports EMLSR mode to send multicast frames, and defines the mechanism for non-AP MLD to receive multicast frames in EMLSR mode.
  • the extended definition of non-AP MLD is in the EMLSR chain. The monitoring operation of the channel is like this to meet the reception of multicast frames in special scenarios.
  • Figure 8 is a schematic structural diagram of a communication device 800 according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the communication device 800 includes a processor 810, and the processor 810 can call and run a computer program from the memory, so that the communication device 800 implements the method in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the communication device 800 may further include a memory 820.
  • the processor 810 can call and run the computer program from the memory 820, so that the communication device 800 implements the method in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the memory 820 may be a separate device independent of the processor 810 , or may be integrated into the processor 810 .
  • the communication device 800 may also include a transceiver 830, and the processor 810 may control the transceiver 830 to communicate with other devices. Specifically, the communication device 800 may send information or data to, or receive data from, other devices. Information or data sent.
  • the transceiver 830 may include a transmitter and a receiver.
  • the transceiver 830 may further include an antenna, and the number of antennas may be one or more.
  • the communication device 800 may be the second multi-link device in the embodiment of the present application, and the communication device 800 may implement various methods in the embodiment of the present application by the second multi-link device. The corresponding process, for the sake of brevity, will not be repeated here.
  • the communication device 800 may be the first multi-link device in the embodiment of the present application, and the communication device 800 may implement various methods in the embodiment of the present application by the first multi-link device. The corresponding process, for the sake of brevity, will not be repeated here.
  • FIG. 9 is a schematic structural diagram of a chip 900 according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the chip 900 includes a processor 910, and the processor 910 can call and run a computer program from the memory to implement the method in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the chip 900 may also include a memory 920 .
  • the processor 910 can call and run the computer program from the memory 920 to implement the method executed by the first multi-link device or the second multi-link device in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the memory 920 may be a separate device independent of the processor 910 , or may be integrated into the processor 910 .
  • the chip 900 may also include an input interface 930 .
  • the processor 910 can control the input interface 930 to communicate with other devices or chips. Specifically, it can obtain information or data sent by other devices or chips.
  • the chip 900 may also include an output interface 940.
  • the processor 910 can control the output interface 940 to communicate with other devices or chips. Specifically, it can output information or data to other devices or chips.
  • the chip can be applied to the second multi-link device in the embodiment of the present application, and the chip can implement the corresponding functions implemented by the second multi-link device in the various methods of the embodiment of the present application.
  • the process for the sake of brevity, will not be repeated here.
  • the chip can be applied to the first multi-link device in the embodiment of the present application, and the chip can implement the corresponding functions implemented by the first multi-link device in the various methods of the embodiment of the present application. The process, for the sake of brevity, will not be repeated here.
  • the chips applied to the second multi-link device and the first multi-link device may be the same chip or different chips.
  • chips mentioned in the embodiments of this application may also be called system-on-chip, system-on-a-chip, system-on-chip or system-on-chip, etc.
  • the processor mentioned above can be a general-purpose processor, a digital signal processor (DSP), an off-the-shelf programmable gate array (FPGA), an application specific integrated circuit (ASIC), or Other programmable logic devices, transistor logic devices, discrete hardware components, etc.
  • DSP digital signal processor
  • FPGA off-the-shelf programmable gate array
  • ASIC application specific integrated circuit
  • the above-mentioned general processor may be a microprocessor or any conventional processor.
  • non-volatile memory may be volatile memory or non-volatile memory, or may include both volatile and non-volatile memory.
  • non-volatile memory can be read-only memory (ROM), programmable ROM (PROM), erasable programmable read-only memory (erasable PROM, EPROM), electrically removable memory. Erase electrically programmable read-only memory (EPROM, EEPROM) or flash memory.
  • Volatile memory can be random access memory (RAM).
  • the memory in the embodiment of the present application can also be a static random access memory (static RAM, SRAM), a dynamic random access memory (dynamic RAM, DRAM), Synchronous dynamic random access memory (synchronous DRAM, SDRAM), double data rate synchronous dynamic random access memory (double data rate SDRAM, DDR SDRAM), enhanced synchronous dynamic random access memory (enhanced SDRAM, ESDRAM), synchronous connection Dynamic random access memory (synch link DRAM, SLDRAM) and direct memory bus random access memory (Direct Rambus RAM, DR RAM) and so on. That is, memories in embodiments of the present application are intended to include, but are not limited to, these and any other suitable types of memories.
  • FIG. 10 is a schematic block diagram of a communication system 1000 according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the communication system 1000 includes a first multi-link device 1010 and a second multi-link device 1020. Specifically include:
  • the first multi-link device 1010 is configured to perform a first listening operation, wherein the first listening operation is used for the first station on the first multi-link device to receive multicast frames using the first receiving capability;
  • the first multi-link device 1020 is configured to send first information.
  • the first information is used by the first multi-link device to perform a first listening operation.
  • the first listening operation is used by the first multi-link device.
  • the first station on the network uses the first receiving capability to receive the multicast frame.
  • the first multi-link device 1010 can be used to implement the corresponding functions implemented by the first multi-link device in the above method
  • the second multi-link device 1020 can be used to implement the second multi-link device in the above method.
  • the corresponding functions implemented by the link device For the sake of brevity, no further details will be given here.
  • the computer program product includes one or more computer instructions.
  • the computer may be a general purpose computer, a special purpose computer, a computer network, or other programmable device.
  • the computer instructions may be stored in or transmitted from one computer-readable storage medium to another computer-readable storage medium, for example, the computer instructions may be transmitted over a wired connection from a website, computer, server, or data center (such as coaxial cable, optical fiber, Digital Subscriber Line (DSL)) or wireless (such as infrared, wireless, microwave, etc.) means to transmit to another website, computer, server or data center.
  • the computer-readable storage medium can be any available medium that can be accessed by a computer or a data storage device such as a server or data center integrated with one or more available media.
  • the available media may be magnetic media (eg, floppy disk, hard disk, tape), optical media (eg, DVD), or semiconductor media (eg, Solid State Disk (SSD)), etc.
  • the size of the sequence numbers of the above-mentioned processes does not mean the order of execution.
  • the execution order of each process should be determined by its functions and internal logic, and should not be used in the embodiments of the present application.
  • the implementation process constitutes any limitation.

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)

Abstract

本申请涉及一种通信方法和设备。其中，该通信方法包括：第一多链路设备MLD进行第一监听操作，其中，所述第一监听操作用于所述第一MLD上的第一站点采用第一接收能力接收组播帧。这样，本申请实施例能够实现更多场景下的组播帧的接收。

Description

通信方法和设备 技术领域
本申请涉及通信领域，更具体地，涉及一种通信方法和设备。
背景技术
目前相关协议定义了多链路设备(Multi-Link Device，MLD)，比如，非接入点(non-Access Point，non-AP)MLD在EMLSR链路上的监听操作，但是，现有监听操作，会受限于帧的接收能力而导致一些特殊场景下无法正常接收帧。
发明内容
本申请实施例提供一种通信方法和设备，可以实现更多场景下的组播帧的接收。
本申请实施例提供一种通信方法，包括：
第一多链路设备MLD执行第一监听操作，其中，所述第一监听操作用于所述第一MLD上的第一站点采用第一接收能力接收组播帧。
本申请实施例提供一种通信方法，包括：
第二多链路设备MLD发送第一信息，所述第一信息用于第一多链路设备MLD执行第一监听操作，所述第一监听操作用于所述第一MLD上的第一站点采用第一接收能力接收组播帧。
本申请实施例提供一种第一多链路设备，包括：
处理单元，用于执行第一监听操作，其中，所述第一监听操作用于所述第一多链路设备MLD上的第一站点采用第一接收能力接收组播帧。
本申请实施例提供一种第二多链路设备，包括：
发送单元，用于发送第一信息，所述第一信息用于第一多链路设备MLD执行第一监听操作，所述第一监听操作用于所述第一MLD上的第一站点采用第一接收能力接收组播帧。
本申请实施例提供一种第一多链路设备，包括处理器和存储器。该存储器用于存储计算机程序，该处理器用于调用并运行该存储器中存储的计算机程序，以使该第一多链路设备执行上述应用于第一多链路设备的方法。
本申请实施例提供一种第二多链路设备，包括处理器和存储器。该存储器用于存储计算机程序，该处理器用于调用并运行该存储器中存储的计算机程序，以使该第二多链路设备执行上述应用于第二多链路设备的方法。
本申请实施例提供一种芯片，用于实现上述应用于第一多链路设备的方法。
具体地，该芯片包括：处理器，用于从存储器中调用并运行计算机程序，使得安装有该芯片的设备执行上述应用于第一多链路设备的方法。
本申请实施例提供一种芯片，用于实现上述应用于第二多链路设备的方法。
具体地，该芯片包括：处理器，用于从存储器中调用并运行计算机程序，使得安装有该芯片的设备执行上述应用于第二多链路设备的方法。
本申请实施例提供一种计算机可读存储介质，用于存储计算机程序，当该计算机程序被设备运行时使得该设备执行上述应用于第一多链路设备的方法；或者，执行上述应用于第二多链路设备的方法。
本申请实施例提供一种计算机程序产品，包括计算机程序指令，该计算机程序指令使得计算机执行上述应用于第一多链路设备的方法；或者，执行上述应用于第二多链路设备的方法。
本申请实施例提供一种计算机程序，当其在计算机上运行时，使得计算机执行上述应用于第一多链路设备的方法；或者，执行上述应用于第二多链路设备的方法。
本申请实施例提供一种通信系统，包括：
第一多链路设备，用于执行如应用于第一多链路设备所述的方法；
第二多链路设备，用于执行如应用于第二多链路设备所述的方法。
本申请实施例，通过第一多链路设备MLD执行第一监听操作，可以实现更多场景下的组播帧的接收。
附图说明
图1是根据本申请实施例的应用场景的示意图。
图2(A)是EMLSR模式下MU-RTS触发帧触发的帧交换示意图。
图2(B)是EMLSR模式下BSR触发帧触发的帧交换示例。
图3是根据本申请一实施例的通信方法300的示意性流程图。
图4是根据本申请另一实施例的通信方法400的示意性流程图。
图5是根据本申请一实施例第一多链路设备500的示意性框图。
图6是根据本申请一实施例的第二多链路设备600的示意性框图。
图7(A)至图7(F)是根据本申请实施例通信方法在一具体示例中的实现流程示意图一至六。
图8是根据本申请实施例的通信设备示意性框图。
图9是根据本申请实施例的芯片的示意性框图。
图10是根据本申请实施例的通信系统的示意性框图。
具体实施方式
下面将结合本申请实施例中的附图，对本申请实施例中的技术方案进行描述。
本申请实施例的技术方案可以应用于各种通信系统，例如：无线局域网(WLAN)、无线保真(Wireless Fidelity，WiFi)或其他通信系统等。
示例性的，本申请实施例应用的通信系统100如图1所示。该通信系统100可以包括接入点(Access Point，AP)110，以及通过接入点110接入网络的站点(STATION，STA)120。
在一些场景中，AP或称AP STA，即在某种意义上来说，AP也是一种STA。
在一些场景中，STA或称非AP STA(non-AP STA)。
通信系统100中的通信可以是AP与non-AP STA之间的通信，也可以是non-AP STA与non-AP STA之间的通信，或者STA和peer STA之间的通信，其中，peer STA可以指与STA对端通信的设备，例如，peer STA可能为AP，也可能为non-AP STA。
AP相当于一个连接有线网和无线网的桥梁，主要作用是将各个无线网络客户端连接到一起，然后将无线网络接入以太网。AP设备可以是终端设备(如手机)或者网络设备(如路由器)。该终端设备或者网络设备具有实现通信功能的芯片，例如WLAN或者WiFi芯片。
应理解，STA在通信系统中的角色不是绝对的，例如，在一些场景中，手机连接路由的时候，手机是non-AP STA，手机作为其他手机的热点的情况下，手机充当了AP的角色。
AP和non-AP STA可以是应用于车联网中的设备，物联网(Internet Of Things，IoT)中的物联网节点、传感器等，智慧家居中的智能摄像头，智能遥控器，智能水表电表等，以及智慧城市中的传感器等。
在一些实施例中，non-AP STA可以支持802.11be制式。non-AP STA也可以支持802.11ax、802.11ac、802.11n、802.11g、802.11b及802.11a等多种当前以及未来的802.11家族的无线局域网(wireless local area networks，WLAN)制式。
在一些实施例中，AP可以为支持802.11be制式的设备。AP也可以为支持802.11ax、802.11ac、802.11n、802.11g、802.11b及802.11a等多种当前以及未来的802.11家族的WLAN制式的设备。
在本申请实施例中，STA可以是支持WLAN/WiFi技术的手机(Mobile Phone)、平板电脑(Pad)、电脑、虚拟现实(Virtual Reality，VR)设备、增强现实(Augmented Reality，AR)设备、工业控制(industrial control)中的无线设备、机顶盒、无人驾驶(self driving)中的无线设备、车载通信设备、远程医疗(remote medical)中的无线设备、智能电网(smart grid)中的无线设备、运输安全(transportation safety)中的无线设备、智慧城市(smart city)中的无线设备或智慧家庭(smart home)中的无线设备、无线通信芯片/ASIC/SOC/等。
WLAN技术可支持频段可以包括但不限于：低频段(例如2.4GHz、5GHz、6GHz)、高频段(例如45GHz、60GHz)。
图1示例性地示出了一个AP STA和两个non-AP STA，可选地，该通信系统100可以包括多个AP STA以及包括其它数量的non-AP STA，本申请实施例对此不做限定。
应理解，本文中术语“系统”和“网络”在本文中常被可互换使用。本文中术语“和/或”，仅仅是一种描述关联对象的关联关系，表示可以存在三种关系，例如，A和/或B，可以表示：单独存在A，同时存在A和B，单独存在B这三种情况。另外，本文中字符“/”，一般表示前后关联对象是一种“或”的关系。
应理解，在本申请的实施例中提到的“指示”可以是直接指示，也可以是间接指示，还可以是表示具有关联关系。举例说明，A指示B，可以表示A直接指示B，例如B可以通过A获取；也可以表示A间接指示B，例如A指示C，B可以通过C获取；还可以表示A和B之间具有关联关系。
在本申请实施例的描述中，术语“对应”可表示两者之间具有直接对应或间接对应的关系，也可以表示两者之间具有关联关系，也可以是指示与被指示、配置与被配置等关系。
为便于理解本申请实施例的技术方案，以下对本申请实施例的相关技术进行说明，以下相关技术作为可选方案与本申请实施例的技术方案可以进行任意结合，其均属于本申请实施例的保护范围。
第一、增强多链路单无线(Enhanced Multi-link Single Radio，EMLSR)；
相关协议对EMLSR操作进行了标准化，对EMLSR操作有了更为清晰的流程规范：non-AP MLD 可以在所建立链路集的一个特定子集上工作在EMLSR模式下，该特定子集中的链路称为EMLSR链路。
non-AP MLD可以通过工作在EMLSR链路上的处于唤醒状态(awake state)的附属站点来监听EMLSR链路的信道状态。这里，监听操作(本申请方案称为第二监听操作)包括进行空闲信道评估(Clear Channel Assessment，CCA)以及接收AP MLD发送的帧交换序列的初始控制帧，该初始控制帧采用带一个空间流的非高吞吐量(复制)物理层协议数据单元(non-HT(duplicate)PPDU)发送。
附属于AP MLD的AP(也可称为附属AP)，在EMLSR链路之一上，初始化与non-AP MLD的帧交换，可以向non-AP MLD传输初始控制帧来开启帧交换流程。初始控制帧可以为多用户请求发送(Multiple User Request-To-Send，MU-RTS)触发帧或缓存状态报告轮询(Buffer Status Report Poll，BSRP)触发帧。举例来说，如图2(A)所示，对于MU-RTS触发帧而言，AP MLD的附属AP1传输MU-RTS，non-AP MLD的附属STA1在传输结束的一个短帧间间隔(Short Interframe Space，SIFS)之后发送CTS，相应地，所述AP MLD的附属AP1在传输结束的一个SIFS之后发送A-MPDU，最后，non-AP MLD的附属STA1发送块确认(BlockAck)；这里，所述AP MLD和non-AP MLD均处于EMLSR模式下。如图2(B)所示，对于BSRP触发帧而言，AP MLD的附属AP1分别向non-AP MLD1的附属STA1、non-AP MLD2的附属STA1至non-AP MLD n的附属STA 1传输BSRP触发(Trigger)，相应地，non-AP MLD的附属STA1、non-AP MLD2的附属STA1至non-AP MLD n的附属STA 1分别进行帧交换流程，直至，non-AP MLD的附属STA1、non-AP MLD2的附属STA1至non-AP MLD n的附属STA 1分别发送携带确认的EHT TB PPDU 1(EHT TB PPDU 1 with acknowledgement)、携带确认的EHT TB PPDU 2(EHT TB PPDU 2 with acknowledgement)至携带确认的EHT TB PPDU n(EHT TB PPDU n with acknowledgement)。这里，所述AP MLD和non-AP MLD均处于EMLSR模式下。
这里，对于处于EMLSR模式的non-AP MLD，需要接收MU-RTS触发帧或BSRP触发帧，并在收到帧交换序列的初始控制帧(如MU-RTS触发帧或BSRP触发帧)后，non-AP MLD能够在接收该初始控制帧的链路上发送或接收帧，并且不得在EMLSR链路中的其他链路上发送或接收，直到帧交换序列结束。而且，受空间流能力、操作模式和链路切换延迟的影响，non-AP MLD应能够在初始控制帧请求的响应帧传输结束的一个短帧间间隔(Short Interframe Space，SIFS)之后接收使用多个空间流发送的物理层协议数据单元(Physical Layer Protocol Data Unit，PPDU)。在帧交换序列期间，AP MLD不应在EMLSR链路中的其他链路上向non-AP MLD发送帧。在帧交换序列结束后，non-AP MLD切换回(比如立即切换回)已启用链路上的监听操作。
第二、多链路组播帧的发送与传输；
附属于AP MLD的每个附属AP(也可称为AP MLD对应的附属AP，或称为AP MLD对应的AP)需要在接收传输流量指示图(Delivery Traffic Indication Map，DTIM)信标帧之后立即调度发送(也即调度并发送)缓存的组播帧，以下情况除外，即AP MLD的一个附属TWT调度AP(Target Wake Time scheduling AP，TWT scheduling AP)，在位于发送DTIM信标帧的信标间隔内的广播目标唤醒时间(Target Wake Time，TWT)服务周期内，调度发送缓存的组播帧。
Non-AP MLD的附属STA(也即附属站点)需要遵循以下操作规则，并在对应的链路上接收该Non-AP MLD所关联AP MLD对应的附属AP发送的组播缓存单元(BU)：
当dot11FMSActivated为假(即灵活多播服务(Flexible Multicast Service，FMS)不处于激活状态)，并且ReceiveDTIMs为真(即附属STA应唤醒来接收所有的DTIM帧)时，附属STA需要提前唤醒，使得能够接收所在基本服务集(Basic Service Set，BSS)的AP发送的每一个non-STBC DTIM或每一个STBC DTIM；
当dot11FMSActivated为真(即FMS处于激活状态)，并且ReceiveDTIMs为真(即附属STA应唤醒来接收所有的DTIM帧)，同时附属STA已得到AP针对多播流的交替出现的发送间隔(alternate delivery interval)的授权时，附属STA需要在拥有针对特定FMS流的FMS计数器域(FMS Counter field)、且当前计数值为零的non-STBC DTIM或STBC DTIM之前唤醒。
如果在流量指示图(Traffic Indication Map，TIM)元素中有关AP MLD的一个附属AP的缓存的组播帧指示被non-AP MLD附属的任意站点收到(也即被任意附属站点收到)，则non-AP MLD所附属的关联于该附属AP的、且保持唤醒状态以便接收组播帧的附属站点，需要选择接收所有调度传输于该附属AP所在链路的组播帧。
基于上述可知，相关定义了工作在EMLSR模式下的non-AP MLD在EMLSR链路上的监听操作(本申请方案称为第二监听操作)，该第二监听操作包括进行CCA以及接收AP MLD发送的用于发起帧交换的初始控制帧，比如，包括MU-RTS触发帧或BSRP触发帧。
该第二监听操作的特点是：non-AP MLD在EMLSR链路中所有处于唤醒状态(awake state)的链路对应的附属站点均处于监听状态；而且，该第二监听操作的能力是受限的，除了CCA，以及能够接 收MU-RTS触发帧或BSRP触发帧等初始控制帧的外，对于其他类型的帧，因受限于调制与编码策略(Modulation and Coding Scheme，MCS)/速率/空间流(Spatial Stream，SS)/带宽(Bandwidth，BW)能力，而导致无法正常接收。
因此，在AP MLD支持EMLSR模式、而且存在关联于自身的且工作在EMLSR模式的Non-AP MLD的情况下，若AP MLD处于EMLSR链路上的附属AP在对应链路上，在不先发送MU-RTS控制帧的情形下，直接发送较高阶数或较多SS的视频业务数据的组播帧，并且，该non-AP MLD处于该链路(也即附属AP发送较高阶数或较多SS的视频业务数据的组播帧的链路)上的附属站点(比如附属站点A)为该组播帧的目标接收站点。此时，若Non-AP MLD处于第二监听操作，则该附属站点A由于受限于接收帧的编码速率/MCS/SS/BW处理能力，而无法正确接收采用较高阶数或较多SS的视频业务数据的组播帧。
基于此，针对non-AP MLD在EMLSR模式下，处于EMLSR链路上的站点直接接收(比如，无事先接收MU-RTS触发帧的前提下，直接接收)采用较高阶数或较多SS的组播帧所存在的帧处理问题，本申请方案提供了一种接收组播帧的机制。该机制可以支持EMLSR模式下的AP MLD发送组播帧，同时确保non-AP MLD在EMLSR模式下正常接收较高阶数或较多SS的组播帧。并且，本申请方案还提出了non-AP MLD处于EMLSR链路的监听操作，来满足特殊场景下的组播帧的接收。
图3是根据本申请一实施例的通信方法300的示意性流程图。该方法可选地可以应用于图1所示的系统，但并不仅限于此。该方法包括以下内容的至少部分内容。
S310、第一多链路设备MLD执行第一监听操作，其中，所述第一监听操作用于所述第一MLD上的第一站点采用第一接收能力接收组播帧。
在一种实施方式中，所述第一站点为所述第一MLD的附属站点。具体地，所述第一站点为所述第一MLD上与第一链路对应的站点，所述第一站点用于监听所述第一链路，也就是说，所述第一监听操作用于所述第一站点处于监听状态，以对第一链路的信道状态进行监听。这里，所述第一站点也可称为监听站点。所述第一链路为发送所述组播帧的链路。
在一种实施方式中，所述第一MLD为工作在增强多链路单无线EMLSR模式下的MLD，相应地，所述第一链路为EMLSR链路中的链路。
在一种实施方式中，所述第一MLD为非接入点non-AP MLD。举例来说，所述第一MLD为工作在EMLSR模式下的、且关联于AP MLD(比如第二MLD)的非接入点non-AP MLD。
也就是说，S310具体为：工作在EMLSR模式下的非接入点non-AP MLD执行第一监听操作，其中，所述第一监听操作用于所述non-AP MLD上的第一站点(也即监听站点)监听EMLSR链路中的第一链路，以便于所述第一站点能够通过所述第一链路，并采用第一接收能力接收组播帧。这里，所述第一链路可以为与所述non-AP MLD所关联的AP MLD发送组播帧的链路。这里，所述AP MLD也工作在EMLSR模式下。进一步地，所述AP MLD上的接入点AP(也即附属AP)可以通过所述第一链路向non-AP MLD附属的第一站点发送组播帧。
例如，EMLSR链路中链路的两端分别对应non-AP MLD上的站点和AP MLD上的附属AP；该附属AP通过该链路发送组播帧，相应地，该站点通过该链路接收组播帧。也就是说，对于站点而言，一个站点对应一条链路，同时，也对应一个AP，AP通过自身对应的链路发送组播帧，相应地，该站点通过自身对应的链路接收组播帧。即站点、链路和AP，三者可以一一对应。
在一种实施方式中，所述第一接收能力大于或等于第二接收能力；所述第二接收能力为所述第一MLD在执行第二监听操作下所述第一站点采用的接收能力。其中，所述第一接收能力可以大于所述第二接收能力。
在一具体示例中，所述第一接收能力为EMLSR模式下的接收能力，也即所述第一接收能力为EMLSR模式下的第一MLD的附属的第一站点的接收能力，相应地，所述第二接收能力也为EMLSR模式下的接收能力，也即所述第二接收能力为EMLSR模式下的第一MLD的附属的第一站点的接收能力。
在一种实施方式中，所述第一接收能力包括以下至少之一：第一速率、第一调制与编码策略MCS、第一空间流SS以及第一带宽BW。
在另一种实施例中，第二接收能力包括以下至少之一：第二速率、第二调制与编码策略MCS、第二空间流SS以及第二带宽BW；所述第二接收能力为第二监听操作下所述第一站点具有的接收能力。
这里，所述第一速率大于或等于第二速率；所述第一MCS优于或等于第二MCS；所述第一SS大于或等于第二SS；所述第一BW大于或等于第二BW。
需要说明的是，本申请方案对第一接收能力(或第二接收能力)所包含的参数的数量不作限制，比如，可以为以上参数中的一个、两个，或多个。相应地，所述第一接收能力所包含的参数与所述第二接收能力所包含的参数，可以相同，也可以不同；所述第一接收能力所包含的参数的数量，与所述第二接 收能力所包含的参数的数量，可以相同，也可以不同，本申请方案对此也不作限制。
可以理解的是，所述第一接收能力中至少一个参数(以上参数中的至少之一)大于第二接收能力所对应的参数，就可认为所述第一接收能力大于所述第二接收能力。举例来说，所述第一接收能力包括的第一速率大于第二接收能力所包括的第二速率，此时，若第一接收能力还包括其他参数，即便所述第一接收能力包括的其他参数等于所述第二接收能力所包括的对应参数，也可认为所述第一接收能力大于或可称优于所述第二接收能力。比如，所述第一接收能力包括的第一SS等于第二接收能力所包括的第二SS，此时，由于第一接收能力包括的第一速率大于第二接收能力所包括的第二速率，所以，依然可以认为第一接收能力大于所述第二接收能力。
在一种实施方式中，所述第一接收能力所包括的所有参数，均大于(或称为优于)第二接收能力所对应的参数。如此，以确保能够接收更多场景下的组播帧。具体来说，由于所述第一MLD上的第一站点具有第一接收能力(或者称为具有较优的第一接收能力)，所以，即便在无事先接收初始控制帧，比如MU-RTS触发帧的前提下，依然能够接收采用较高能力所发送的组播帧，比如，依然能够接收第二MLD采用较高速率，或较高MCS(也可称较优MCS)，或较高BW，或较多SS等发送的组播帧。
在一种实施方式中，所述第一监听操作下，所述第一MLD上，只有第一站点处于监听状态，而所述第一MLD上的其他站点均无法进入监听状态，也即不具有接收或发送帧的能力。
或者，在另一种实施方式中，所述第一MLD上还包括第二站点；所述第一监听操作还用于所述第二站点对所述EMLSR链路中的第二链路进行监听(也即使得所述第二站点处于监听状态)，所述第二链路为所述EMLSR链路中除所述第一链路以外的链路；进一步地，所述第二站点也具有所述第一接收能力。也就是说，所述第一监听操作下所述第一站点具有第一接收能力的情况下，所述第一MLD上的第二站点也可以处于监听状态，以对除第一链路之外的其他链路进行监听；此时，所述第二站点也可以具有所述第一接收能力。
具体地，所述第一多链路设备MLD执行第一监听操作为所述第一多链路设备MLD维持执行第一监听操作的情况下，所述第一监听操作还用于第二站点对所述EMLSR链路中的第二链路进行监听，所述第二站点为所述第一MLD上的站点，所述第二链路为所述EMLSR链路中除所述第一链路以外的链路；或者，在所述第一多链路设备MLD执行第一监听操作为所述第一多链路设备从第二监听操作切换至第一监听操作的情况下，所述第一监听操作使得所述第二站点无法进行监听。
可以理解的是，该实施方式中，所述第一监听操作下所述第一站点具有第一接收能力的情况下，所述第一MLD上处于唤醒状态的第二站点可以为一个，也可以为多个，本申请方案对此不作限制。比如，所述第一监听操作下所述第一站点具有第一接收能力的情况下，所述第一MLD上处于唤醒状态的所有第二站点均可以处于监听状态，且所有第二站点具有第一接收能力。可以理解的是，该情况下，第一站点和第二站点的接收能力也可以不同，比如，所述第二站点具有第二接收能力，或者其他接收能力，本申请方案对此不作限制，只要第一站点处于第一接收能力，并且能够正常接收组播帧，均属于本申请方案的保护范围。
举例来说，所述第一监听操作(也即EMLSR模式下的第一监听操作)可以具体指：工作在EMLSR模式下的non-AP MLD上，与EMLSR链路中特定链路(比如第一链路)所对应的附属站点(简称监听站点，比如第一站点)，能够接收采用较高速率/较高MCS/较多SS/较高BW发送的组播帧。
值得注意的是，本申请方案所述的较高速率/较高MCS/较多SS/较高BW指：较高速率、较高MCS、较多SS以及较高BW中的至少一个或多个；也即至少之一。
进一步地，所述non-AP MLD进入EMLSR模式下的第一监听操作存在两种情况：
情况一：第一监听操作下，能够使得附属站点(比如第一站点)进入EMLSR链路中特定链路(比如第一链路)的帧交换处理对应的监听状态；也就是说，第一监听操作下，特定链路(比如第一链路)所对应的附属站点(比如第一站点)帧的接收能力(也可称为帧的处理能力)，与该特定链路进行帧交换处理的能力一致，也即能够接收采用较高速率/较高MCS/较多SS/较高BW发送的组播帧。而且，在这种状态下，EMLSR链路中除对特定链路(比如第一链路)外的其他链路无法进行监听，也即除特定链路外的其他链路无法发送或接收帧。例如，该情况中，可通过切换合并链路的方式，把EMLSR链路中的收发能力(比如把EMLSR链路中其他站点的收发能力)合并到第一站点上，使得第一站点具有较强的第一接收能力。
情况二：第一监听操作下，EMLSR模式下的特定链路(比如第一链路)所在的附属站点(比如第一站点)本身具备接收采用较高速率/较高MCS/较高BW/较多SS发送的组播帧的能力，因此，可保持EMLSR链路中所有处于唤醒状态的附属站点(比如第二站点)均处于监听状态。此时，处于唤醒状态的附属站点(比如第二站点)可以与第一站点的接收能力相同，也可以不同，本申请方案对此不作限制，只要第一站点具有接收采用较高速率/较高MCS/较高BW/较多SS发送的组播帧的能力，均属于本申请 方案的保护范围。可以理解的是，由于该情况中未进行切换合并链路，所以，此时的第一站点的接收能力，可能会弱于切换合并链路后的接收能力。
在一种实施方式中，所述第二监听操作用于所述第一MLD上的目标站点(也即第一MLD的附属站点)对所述目标站点所对应的链路进行监听，其中，所述目标站点为所述第一MLD上处于唤醒状态的站点，所述目标站点具有所述第二接收能力，如所述第二接收能力包括如下至少之一：进行空闲信道评估CCA，接收用于发起帧交换的初始控制帧。又比如，当所述第一MLD上存在两个或两个以上处于唤醒状态的目标站点，此时，所述第二监听操作均能够使得第一MLD上的两个或两个以上的目标站点具有第二接收能力。也就是说，在所述第二监听操作下，所述第一MLD上处于唤醒状态的附属站点，比如一个，或者多个，或者所有处于唤醒状态的附属站点，均能够处于监听状态，且该处于监听状态的附属站点均具有第二接收能力，比如相对于第一接收能力而言，具有较低的第二接收能力。
举例来说，第二监听操作(也即EMLSR模式下的第一监听操作)可以具体指：工作在EMLSR模式下的non-AP MLD上，与EMLSR链路对应的所有处于唤醒状态的附属站点(也即目标站点)，均处于监听状态；其中，所述EMLSR链路对应的每个站点的接收能力，也即第二接收能力，是受限的，除了能够进行CCA、或MU-RTS触发帧等初始控制帧的接收外，对于其他类型的帧而言，因受限于速率/MCS/SS/BW等能力而导致无法正确接收。
在一种实施方式中，所述第一MLD通过采用所述第一接收能力的所述第一站点接收所述组播帧。进一步地，采用所述第一接收能力接收的所述组播帧由物理层协议数据单元PPDU携带，所述PPDU包括以下至少之一：
正交频分复用OFDM物理层协议数据单元PPDU；
非高吞吐量non-HT复制DUP PPDU；
极高吞吐量VHT PPDU；
高吞吐量HT PPDU；
高效率HE单用户SU PPDU；
极高吞吐量EHT多用户MU PPDU在内的极高吞吐量EHT站点STA所支持的PPDU。
举例来说，工作在EMLSR模式的non-AP MLD在EMLSR链路中特定链路(也即第一链路)所对应的附属站点(比如第一站点)能接收采用较高速率/较高MCS/较多空间流(SS)/较高BW发送的PPDU。这里，所述PPDU可以为以下至少之一：OFDM PPDU，non-HT DUP PPDU，VHT PPDU，HT PPDU，HE SU PPDU，EHT MU PPDU在内的EHT STA所支持的PPDU，如此，确保所述non-AP MLD能够正确接收采用以下参数至少之一的、且携带组播帧的PPDU。其中，所述参数包括：较高速率，较高MCS，较多SS和较高BW。
在一种实施方式中，所述第一MLD在所述组播帧接收完成的情况下，从所述第一监听操作切换至第二监听操作。比如，所述non-AP MLD在所述组播帧接收完成的情况下，比如所述non-AP MLD基于指示确认组播帧接收完成，或者，在组播帧在广播TWT服务周期或带重试的组播(Groupcast With Retries，GCR)服务周期内发送的情况下，所述non-AP MLD在到达广播TWT服务周期或GCR服务周期SP的结束时间点，且无正在接收的组播帧的情况下，从EMLSR模式下的第一监听操作切换到EMLSR模式下的第二监听操作。
本申请方案中，所述第一多链路设备MLD执行第一监听操作，可以采用如下几种方式：
方式一：所述第一MLD基于第一信息执行第一监听操作；也即S310具体为：第一MLD基于第一信息执行第一监听操作。进一步地，所述第一信息用于所述第一MLD在目标时间或目标时间之前执行所述第一监听操作。也即S310具体为：所述第一MLD基于第一信息使得所述第一MLD在目标时间或目标时间之前执行所述第一监听操作。
可以理解的是，在一示例中，所述第一信息包含目标时间，此时，所述第一信息用于所述第一MLD在所述第一信息所包含的目标时间或目标时间之前执行所述第一监听操作。或者，在另一示例中，所述第一信息不包含目标时间，此时，所述目标时间是第一MLD预先接收的，此时，所述第一信息用于所述第一MLD在预先获取的目标时间或目标时间之前执行所述第一监听操作。本申请方案，对目标时间是否携带于第一信息中不作限制，只要所述第一信息能够使得第一MLD在目标时间或目标时间之前执行所述第一监听操作，均属于本申请方案的保护范围。
在一种实施方式中，步骤S310，具体包括：所述第一多链路设备MLD从第二监听操作切换至所述第一监听操作；或者，所述第一多链路设备MLD维持执行所述第一监听操作。进一步地，步骤S310具体包括：所述第一多链路设备MLD基于所述第一信息从第二监听操作切换至所述第一监听操作；或者，所述第一多链路设备MLD基于所述第一信息维持执行所述第一监听操作。
在一种实施方式中，该方式一中所述目标时间包括第一时间点，所述第一时间点可以具体包括以下 至少之一：
(1)预期的组播帧发送时间点。此时，所述第一MLD在预期的组播帧发送时间点，或者在预期的组播帧发送时间点之前的时间点，执行所述第一监听操作；这里，所述预期的组播帧发送时间点可以为预先约定的任意时间点，本申请方案对此不作限制。
(2)预期的传输流量指示图DTIM信标帧的目标信标发送时间(Target Beacon Transmission Time，TBTT)；这里，所述预期的组播帧发送时间点晚于所述DTIM信标帧的TBTT。此时，所述第一MLD在预期的DTIM信标帧的TBTT，或者在预期的DTIM信标帧的TBTT之前的时间点，执行所述第一监听操作。
(3)预期发送组播帧的广播目标唤醒时间TWT服务周期SP的起始时间；这里，所述预期的组播帧发送时间点位于所述TWT服务周期SP内。此时，所述第一MLD在预期发送组播帧的广播目标唤醒时间TWT服务周期SP的起始时间，或者所述起始时间之前的时间点，执行所述第一监听操作。
(4)特定灵活多播服务FMS流的FMS计数器域当前计数值为零的非空时分组码non-STBC DTIM信标帧的TBTT；这里，所述预期的组播帧发送时间点晚于FMS流的FMS计数器域当前计数值为零的non-STBC DTIM信标帧的TBTT。此时，所述第一MLD在特定FMS流的FMS计数器域当前计数值为零的non-STBC DTIM信标帧的TBTT，或者，在特定FMS流的FMS计数器域当前计数值为零的non-STBC DTIM信标帧的TBTT之前的时间点，执行所述第一监听操作。
(5)预期发送组播帧的带重试的组播GCR服务周期的起始时间；这里，所述预期的组播帧发送时间点位于所述GCR服务周期内。此时，所述第一MLD在预期发送组播帧的带重试的组播GCR服务周期的起始时间，或者该起始时间之前的时间点，执行所述第一监听操作。
举例来说，工作在EMLSR模式的non-AP MLD在预期的组播帧发送时间点，或者预期的组播帧发送时间点之前执行第一监听操作，以对EMLSR链路中调度发送组播帧所在链路(也即第一链路)进行监听。比如，工作在EMLSR模式的non-AP MLD，在预期的组播帧发送时间点之前，提前执行第一监听操作，以对EMLSR链路中调度发送组播帧所在链路(也即第一链路)进行监听。进一步地，工作在EMLSR模式的non-AP MLD，在执行第一监听操作的情况下，可以通过所述第一链路进行组播帧的接收，并在确认接收完组播帧之后，切换为第二监听操作。也就是说，当non-AP MLD关联于一个支持EMLSR模式的AP MLD，并且non-AP MLD在EMLSR链路上采用EMLSR模式进行操作的情况下，如果组播帧将被调度传输在non-AP MLD对应的EMLSR链路中一条链路(比如第一链路)上，且non-AP MLD上处于该链路(比如第一链路)的站点(设为站点A，也即第一站点)准备接收该组播帧，则non-AP MLD需要确保在预期的组播帧发送时间点或之前提前进入第一监听操作，使得站点A对传输组播帧的该链路(也即第一链路)进行监听，以便能正确地接收组播帧。
进一步地，对于组播帧的发送端而言，AP MLD的附属AP调度发送缓存的组播帧的方法可以采用如下至少之一：
(1)AP MLD的附属AP在预期的组播帧发送时间点调度发送缓存的组播帧；这里，所述预期的组播帧发送时间点可以为预先约定的任意时间点，本申请方案对此不作限制。
(2)AP MLD的附属AP在发送DTIM信标帧(beacon)之后调度发送缓存的组播帧；比如，在每个DTIM信标帧(beacon)之后调度发送缓存的组播帧。
(3)AP MLD的附属AP在广播TWT服务周期SP内调度发送组播帧；比如，AP MLD的一个附属AP为TWT调度AP(TWT scheduling AP)，TWT调度AP在位于发送DTIM信标帧所在的信标间隔(beacon interval)期间的广播TWT服务周期SP内调度发送缓存的组播帧。
(4)采用特定灵活多播服务FMS发送缓存的组播帧；比如，在特定灵活多播服务FMS流的FMS计数器域当前计数值为零的非空时分组码non-STBC DTIM信标帧的TBTT之后的时间点，调度发送缓存的组播帧。
(5)采用GCR发送缓存的组播帧。比如，在GCR服务周期内，调度发送缓存的组播帧。
举例来说，当AP MLD通过EMLSR链路中的某条链路(比如第一链路)在DTIM信标帧之后调度发送缓存的组播帧时，工作在EMLSR模式下的non-AP MLD，会首先在预期的DTIM信标帧TBTT或之前进入组播帧调度发送所在链路(比如第一链路)的第一监听操作，也即在预期的DTIM信标帧TBTT或之前执行第一监听操作，以对组播帧调度发送所在链路(也即第一链路)进行监听。随后，工作在EMLSR模式下的non-AP MLD，在接收完DTIM信标帧后，维持针对组播帧调度发送所在链路(比如第一链路)的第一监听操作(也即维持帧交换操作状态)，也即维持第一监听操作，以维持对组播帧调度发送所在链路(比如第一链路)的监听，直到完成组播帧的接收。进一步地，当non-AP MLD收到指示，比如，收到第一链路的AP发送的组播帧的更多数据子域(More Data subfield)为0，则确认没有更多的组播帧时，此时，从第一监听操作(也可称帧交换操作)返回至EMLSR模式下的第二监听 操作。
再比如，当AP MLD在广播TWT服务周期或GCR服务周期内调度发送缓存的组播帧的情况下，工作在EMLSR模式下的non-AP MLD，会首先在预期的调度发送组播帧的广播TWT服务周期或GCR服务周期的起始时间或之前，提前进入组播帧调度发送所在链路(比如第一链路)的第一监听操作，也即提前进入第一监听操作，以对组播帧调度发送所在链路(比如第一链路)进行监听。随后，工作在EMLSR模式下的non-AP MLD，在接收完DTIM信标帧后，维持针对组播帧调度发送所在链路(比如第一链路)的第一监听操作(也即维持帧交换操作状态)，也即维持第一监听操作，以维持对组播帧调度发送所在链路(比如第一链路)的监听，直到完成组播帧的接收。进一步地，当non-AP MLD收到指示确认没有组播帧(也即接收完组播帧)时，所述non-AP MLD从第一监听操作(也即帧交换操作)返回至EMLSR模式下的所述第二监听操作；或者，在到达广播TWT服务周期或GCR服务周期(SP)的结束时间点，且无正在接收的组播帧时，则从第一监听操作返回到EMLSR模式下的第二监听操作。
在一种实施方式中，所述第一时间点是所述第一MLD预先接收到的；具体地，所述第一时间点是所述第一MLD从所关联的第二MLD预先接收到的；更具体地，所述第一时间点是non-AP MLD从所关联的AP MLD预先接收到的，比如，在S310之前接收到的，以确保所述第一MLD在预期的组播帧发送之前提前执行第一监听操作，以使第一站点对EMLSR链路中调度发送组播帧所在链路进行监听。
方式二：所述第一信息为传输流量指示图DTIM信标帧，所述DTIM信标帧用于所述第一MLD在目标时间或目标时间之前执行所述第一监听操作。进一步地，与方式一的不同点在于，该方式二中，所述目标时间包括第二时间点，也即所述DTIM信标帧用于所述第一MLD在第二时间点或第二时间点之前执行所述第一监听操作。
可以理解的是，在一示例中，所述DTIM信标帧可以包含目标时间(比如第二时间点)，也即携带目标时间，此时，所述DTIM信标帧用于所述第一MLD在所述DTIM信标帧所携带的目标时间或目标时间之前执行所述第一监听操作。或者，在另一示例中，所述DTIM信标帧不包含目标时间，也即不携带目标时间；此时，所述目标时间是第一MLD预先接收的，进一步地，所述DTIM信标帧用于所述第一MLD在预先获取的目标时间或目标时间之前执行所述第一监听操作。本申请方案，对目标时间是否携带于DTIM信标帧中不作限制，只要所述DTIM信标帧能够使得第一MLD在目标时间或目标时间之前执行所述第一监听操作，均属于本申请方案的保护范围。
在一种实施方式中，所述第一MLD，在预期传输的DTIM信标帧的TBTT之前，执行所述第二监听操作，也即所述第二监听操作是所述第一MLD在预期传输的DTIM信标帧的目标信标发送时间TBTT之前所执行的。进一步地，第一MLD基于第一信息执行第一监听操作，可以具体包括：所述第一MLD在所述第二时间点或第二时间点之前从第二监听操作切换至所述第一监听操作。也就是说，该方式二中，所述第一MLD先在预期传输的DTIM信标帧的TBTT之前，执行第二监听操作，在第二监听操作的情况下，接收所述DTIM信标帧，进而在所述第二时间点或第二时间点之前，从第二监听操作切换至所述第一监听操作，如此，使得所述第一MLD的第一站点从具有较低的第二接收能力，切换至具有较高的第一接收能力，进而确保所述第一MLD的第一站点能够正常接收组播帧。
进一步地，所述第二时间点包括：接收完DTIM信标帧之后的预期的组播帧发送时间点；这里，所述DTIM信标帧是所述第一MLD在第二监听操作下所接收的。也就是说，预期的组播帧发送时间点是位于发送DTIM信标帧的时间点之后，此时，所述第一MLD先接收DTIM信标帧，并在接收完DTIM信标帧之后的预期的组播帧发送时间点，或者，在接收完DTIM信标帧之后的预期的组播帧发送时间点之前执行所述第一监听操作。可以理解的是，在第一MLD在接收完DTIM信标帧的时间点即可执行所述第一监听操作。
举例来说，工作在EMLSR模式的non-AP MLD，当准备在EMLSR链路中的一条链路上接收组播帧时，可以先在DTIM信标帧的TBTT之前进入第二监听操作。并在接收完DTIM信标帧之后、且在预期的组播帧调度发送的时间点之前，从所述第二监听操作切换进入第一监听操作，使得所述第一MLD的第一站点对EMLSR链路中组播帧调度发送所在链路(比如第一链路)进行监听。这里，所述第一监听操作下，所述第一站点具有第一接收能力，如此，确保能够正常接收组播帧。进一步地，在第一监听操作下，所述non-AP MLD通过第一站点接收组播帧，直到完成组播帧的接收。如non-AP MLD收到指示确认没有更多的组播帧的情况下，即可认为接收完成。随后，从第一监听操作(也即帧交换操作)返回到第二监听操作。
可以理解的是，AP MLD在EMLSR链路上发送DTIM信标帧之后，且在调度发送组播帧的起始时间点之前，需要预留足够的时长，如此，可以确保工作在EMLSR模式下的、该AP MLD所关联的non-AP MLD，在接收完DTIM信标帧之后并在组播帧发送的时间点或组播帧发送的时间点之前，切换进入EMLSR链路中组播帧调度发送所在链路(比如第一链路)的第一监听操作。
方式三：所述第一信息是基于第一指示确定的；所述第一指示用于指示在需要接收组播帧的情况下是否执行所述第一监听操作。比如，所述第一指示具体用于指示在需要接收组播帧的情况下执行所述第一监听操作，或者，指示在需要接收组播帧的情况下无需执行所述第一监听操作。进一步地，该方式三中，所述第一指示可以通过如下两种方式来表达，分别包括：
第一种方式：
所述第一指示用于统一指示接入点AP对应的第一MLD在需要接收组播帧的情况下是否执行所述第一监听操作；这里，所述接入点AP为与所述第一MLD所关联的第二MLD对应的AP；所述第二MLD对应的AP包括以下至少之一：第二MLD的附属AP，所述第二MLD的附属AP所在多基本服务集标识符集(multiple Basic Service Set Identifier set，多BSSID集)中BSSID所指的AP。
例如，所述接入点AP对应的第一MLD，可以具体为：接入点AP对应的第一站点所对应的第一MLD；可以理解的是，链路，比如EMLSR链路中链路的两端，分别对应的是第一MLD上的第一站点和第二MLD对应的接入点AP，而且，站点、链路和AP三者可以一一对应，基于此，与接入点AP所对应的是站点，而站点与第一MLD相对应。
需要说明的是，所述第一指示中不携带目标时间，比如，不携带第一时间点，所述第一指示的目的是指示在需要接收组播的情况下是否需要执行第一监听操作。基于此，所述第一时间点可以是第一MLD通过其他方式提前获取到的，本申请方案对此不作具体限制。或者，在另外一种情况下，所述第一指示不仅指示在需要接收组播的情况下是否需要执行第一监听操作，还可以携带目标时间，比如第一时间点，此时，无需第一MLD提前去获取第一时间点。实际应用中，上述两种方式可以择一执行，本申请方案不作限制。
在一种实施方式中，所述第一指示的取值为第一值(比如为1)的情况下，用于统一指示接入点AP对应的第一MLD在需要接收组播帧的情况下执行所述第一监听操作；
或者，所述第一指示的取值为第二值(比如为0)的情况下，用于统一指示接入点AP对应的第一MLD在需要接收组播帧的情况下无需执行所述第一监听操作。
在一种实施方式中，所述第一指示由EMLSR操作指示元素携带。进一步地，所述第一指示由EMLSR操作指示元素中的第一字段携带。
在一种实施方式中，所述第一字段包括第二指示；所述第二指示的取值为第三值(比如为1)的情况下，所述第一字段包括所述第一指示。
在一种实施方式中，所述第一字段为EMLSR操作指示位图控制。所述第一指示为EMLSR操作统一指示。进一步地，所述第二指示为EMLSR操作统一指示存在；其中，所述EMLSR操作统一指示存在用于指示第一字段(也即EMLSR操作指示位图控制)中是否包括EMLSR操作统一指示。
可以理解的是，实际应用中，所述EMLSR操作指示元素中还可以包括其他字段，本申请方案对所包含的字段不作具体限制。
举例来说，表1为第一种情况下EMLSR操作指示元素所包含的字段(也可称为域(fields))的示例；表2为第一种情况下EMLSR操作指示位图控制所包含的指示的示例。
Figure PCTCN2022090805-appb-000001
表1
Figure PCTCN2022090805-appb-000002
表2
如表1所示，所述EMLSR操作指示元素包括元素标识(Element ID)、长度(Length)、元素标识扩展(Element ID Extension)；这里，所述元素标识、长度、元素标识扩展均占用1个字节，具体定义可类似于相关标准中的定义。
进一步地，所述EMLSR操作指示元素还包括EMLSR操作指示位图控制(EMLSR Operation  Indicator Bitmap Control)，也占用1个字节。
如表2所示，所述EMLSR操作指示位图控制包括EMLSR操作统一指示存在(EMLSR Operation for ALL Indicator Present)，在所述EMLSR操作统一指示存在的取值为1的情况下，所述EMLSR操作指示位图控制还包括：EMLSR操作统一指示(EMLSR Operation for ALL Indicator)和预留(Reserved)。这里，所述EMLSR操作统一指示存在、EMLSR操作统一指示和预留分别占用1个位、1个位和6个位。基于此，EMLSR操作指示位图控制所包括的EMLSR操作统一指示存在、EMLSR操作统一指示和预留共占用一个字节。
这里，EMLSR操作统一指示(或称EMLSR操作统一指示域，也即第一指示)用于统一指示AP对应的工作在EMLSR模式下的non-AP MLD，在需要接收组播帧的情况下，是否执行第一监听操作，所述第一监听操作用于该non-AP MLD上、与AP对应的第一站点具有第一接收能力，进而使该第一站点对该该AP所在链路进行监听。也即，EMLSR操作统一指示用于统一指示AP对应的工作在EMLSR模式下的non-AP MLD，在需要接收组播帧的情况下，是否执行具有较高速率/较高MCS/较多SS/较高BW的接收能力(也即第一接收能力)、且该AP所在链路(比如第一链路)的第一监听操作。
其中，所述AP为以下至少之一：AP MLD的附属AP，AP MLD的附属AP所在多BSSID集(multiple BSSID set)中的BSSID所指的AP。所述non-AP MLD与AP MLD所关联。
可以理解的是，AP对应的工作在EMLSR模式下的non-AP MLD，可以具体为：AP对应的站点(比如第一站点)所对应的工作在EMLSR模式下的non-AP MLD。
进一步地，当EMLSR操作统一指示取值为1的情况下，表示AP对应的工作在EMLSR模式下的non-AP MLD，在需要接收组播帧的情况下，执行具有较高速率/较高MCS/较多空间流(SS)/较高BW的接收能力(也即第一接收能力)、该AP所在链路(比如第一链路)的第一监听操作。
当EMLSR操作统一指示取值为0，表示AP对应的工作在EMLSR模式下的non-AP MLD，在需要接收组播帧的情况下，无需执行具有较高速率/较高MCS/较多空间流(SS)/较高BW的接收能力(也即第一接收能力)、该AP所在链路(比如第一链路)的第一监听操作。
在一种实施方式中，所述EMLSR操作指示元素由管理帧携带。此时，所述第一信息可以具体为管理帧。进一步地，所述第一MLD接收所述管理帧。具体地，在S310之前，所述第一MLD接收所述管理帧。比如，所述第一MLD接收第二MLD所发送的管理帧，如此，便于基于所述管理帧来执行第一监听操作；这里，在一示例中，所述管理帧包括流量指示图TIM信标帧。
第二种方式：
所述第一指示中每一位的位置，用于指示接入点AP；
所述第一指示中每一位的值，用于指示接入点AP对应的第一MLD在需要接收组播帧的情况下是否执行所述第一监听操作。
这里，所述接入点AP为与所述第一MLD所关联的第二MLD对应的AP；所述第二MLD对应的AP包括以下至少之一：第二MLD的附属AP，所述第二MLD的附属AP所在多BSSID集中BSSID所指的AP。
例如，所述接入点AP对应的第一MLD，可以具体为：接入点AP对应的第一站点所对应的第一MLD；可以理解的是，链路，比如EMLSR链路中链路的两端，分别对应的是第一MLD上的第一站点和第二MLD对应的接入点AP，而且，站点、链路和AP三者可以一一对应，基于此，与接入点AP所对应的是站点，而站点与第一MLD相对应。
需要说明的是，所述第一指示中不携带目标时间，比如，不携带第一时间点，所述第一指示的目的是指示在需要接收组播的情况下是否需要执行第一监听操作。基于此，所述第一时间点可以是第一MLD通过其他方式提前获取到的，本申请方案对此不作具体限制。或者，在另外一种情况下，所述第一指示不仅指示在需要接收组播的情况下是否需要执行第一监听操作，还可以携带目标时间，比如第一时间点，此时，无需第一MLD提前去获取第一时间点。实际应用中，上述两种方式可以择一执行，本申请方案不作限制。
在一种实施方式中，所述第一指示中每一位的取值为第四值(比如1)的情况下，用于指示接入点AP对应的第一MLD在需要接收组播帧的情况下执行所述第一监听操作；
或者，所述第一指示中每一位的取值为第五值(比如0)的情况下，用于指示接入点AP对应的第一MLD在需要接收组播帧的情况下无需执行所述第一监听操作。
在一种实施方式中，所述第一指示由EMLSR操作指示元素携带。进一步地，所述第一指示由EMLSR操作指示元素中的第二字段携带。
在一种实施方式中，所述第二字段为部分EMLSR操作指示位图；所述部分EMLSR操作指示位图是通过截取EMLSR操作指示位图中部分连续比特而形成的。
在一种实施方式中，所述EMLSR操作指示元素包括第一字段；其中，所述第一字段中的第二指示的取值为第六值(比如为0)的情况下，所述第一字段包括第三指示；所述第三指示用于指示从所述EMLSR操作指示位图中截取的部分连续比特的位置。在一种实施方式中，所述第三指示为位图偏移量，这样，基于所述位图偏移量即可从所述EMLSR操作指示位图中截取得到所述部分EMLSR操作指示位图。
在一种实施方式中，所述第一字段为EMLSR操作指示位图控制。所述第一指示为EMLSR操作统一指示。进一步地，所述第二指示为EMLSR操作统一指示存在；其中，所述EMLSR操作统一指示存在用于指示第一字段(也即EMLSR操作指示位图控制)中是否包括EMLSR操作统一指示。举例来说，所述EMLSR操作统一指示存在的取值为第三值(比如为1)的情况下，所述EMLSR操作指示位图控制包括所述EMLSR操作统一指示，此时，还可以包括预留。该情况下，通过所述EMLSR操作统一指示来统一指示相应的第一MLD是否需要执行第一监听操作。进一步地，所述EMLSR操作统一指示存在的取值为第六值(比如为0)的情况下，所述EMLSR操作指示位图控制包括所述位图偏移量。此时，所述EMLSR操作指示元素中还需要包括部分EMLSR操作指示位图，进而通过部分EMLSR操作指示位图来指示相应的第一MLD是否需要执行第一监听操作。
可以理解的是，实际应用中，所述EMLSR操作指示元素中还可以包括其他字段，本申请方案对所包含的字段不作具体限制。
可以理解的是，上述第一值、第二值至第六值的取值仅为一具体示例，实际应用中，第一值、第二值至第六值还可以取其他值，比如2、3或10等任意值，本申请方案对此不作限制。
举例来说，表3为第二种情况下EMLSR操作指示元素所包含的字段(也可称为域)的示例；表4为第二种情况下EMLSR操作指示位图控制所包含的指示的示例。
Figure PCTCN2022090805-appb-000003
表3
Figure PCTCN2022090805-appb-000004
表4
如表3所示，所述EMLSR操作指示元素包括元素标识(Element ID)、长度(Length)、元素标识扩展(Element ID Extension)；这里，所述元素标识、长度、元素标识扩展均占用1个字节，具体定义可类似于相关标准中的定义。
进一步地，所述EMLSR操作指示元素还包括EMLSR操作指示位图控制(EMLSR Operation Indicator Bitmap Control)和部分EMLSR操作指示位图(Partial EMLSR Operation Indicator Bitmap)；其中，所述EMLSR操作指示位图控制占用1个字节。所述部分EMLSR操作指示位图占用1-251中任意数值个字节。这里，可以理解的是，对于上述第一种方式而言，可以理解为该部分EMLSR操作指示位图占用的字节数为0。
如表4所示，所述EMLSR操作指示位图控制包括EMLSR操作统一指示存在(EMLSR Operation for ALL Indicator Present)，在所述EMLSR操作统一指示存在的取值为0的情况下，所述EMLSR操作指示位图控制还包括：位图偏移量(Bitmap Offset)。这里，所述EMLSR操作统一指示存在和位图偏移量分别占用1个位和7个位。基于此，EMLSR操作指示位图控制所包括的EMLSR操作统一指示存在和位图偏移量共占用一个字节。
这里，位图偏移量可类似于相关标准中TIM元素的位图偏移量(Bitmap Offset)域的定义，区别在于，相关标准中TIM元素的位图偏移量(Bitmap Offset)域对应于流量标记虚拟位图(traffic indication virtual bitmap)，而本申请方案中的位图偏移量对应的是EMLSR操作指示位图。
进一步地，部分EMLSR操作指示位图(也可称为部分EMLSR操作指示位图域，或字段)是通过截取EMLSR操作指示位图中有意义的部分连续比特而形成的，其截取方式与相关标准中TIM元素的形成部分流量标记虚拟位图的方式一致，该部分流量标记虚拟位图是截取流量标记虚拟位图的部分连续位置的比特而形成的；而区别在于两者比特值的定义不同。
具体地，本申请方案中，EMLSR操作指示位图中每一位的位置对应于AP，这里，AP为以下至少之一：AP MLD的附属AP，AP MLD的附属AP所在多BSSID集中的BSSID所指的AP。本申请方案中，EMLSR操作指示位图中位的位置(bit positions)定义，与相关标准中TIM元素的流量标记虚拟位图(traffic indication virtual bitmap)中有组播帧缓存时的AP与位的位置之间对应关系定义一致。
进一步地，EMLSR操作指示位图中的每一位的值指示：该位对应的AP，在有组播帧缓存时，该AP对应的工作在EMLSR模式下的non-AP MLD，是否执行第一监听操作，所述第一监听操作用于该non-AP MLD上、与AP对应的第一站点具有第一接收能力，进而使该第一站点对该AP所在链路进行监听。或者，EMLSR操作指示位图中的每一位的值指示：该位对应的AP所对应的工作在EMLSR模式下的non-AP MLD，在需要接收组播帧的情况下，是否执行第一监听操作，所述第一监听操作用于该non-AP MLD上、与AP对应的第一站点具有第一接收能力，进而使该第一站点对该AP所在链路进行监听。
也就是说，EMLSR操作指示位图中的每一位的值指示：该位对应的AP，在有组播帧缓存时，是否需要该AP对应的工作在EMLSR模式下的non-AP MLD，执行具备较高速率/较高MCS/较多SS/较高BW的接收能力(也即第一接收能力)、且处于该AP所在链路(比如第一链路)的第一监听操作。换言之，EMLSR操作指示位图中的每一位的值指示：该位对应的AP对应的工作在EMLSR模式下的non-AP MLD，在需要接收组播帧的情况下，是否需要执行具备较高速率/较高MCS/较多SS/较高BW的接收能力(也即第一接收能力)、且处于该AP所在链路(比如第一链路)的第一监听操作。
可以理解的是，AP对应的工作在EMLSR模式下的non-AP MLD，可以具体为：AP对应的站点(比如第一站点)所对应的工作在EMLSR模式下的non-AP MLD。所述non-AP MLD与所述AP MLD所关联。
进一步地，当EMLSR操作指示位图中某一位的值为1时，表示该位所对应的AP，当有组播帧缓存时，需要该AP对应的工作在EMLSR模式下的non-AP MLD执行具备较高速率/较高MCS/较多SS/较高BW的接收能力、且处于该AP所在链路的第一监听操作；
当EMLSR操作指示位图中某一位的值为0时，表示该位所对应的AP，当有组播帧缓存时，无需该AP对应的工作在EMLSR模式下的non-AP MLD在执行具备较高速率/较高MCS/较多SS/较高BW的接收能力、且处于该AP所在链路的第一监听操作。
在一种实施方式中，所述EMLSR操作指示元素由管理帧携带。此时，所述第一信息可以具体为管理帧。进一步地，所述第一MLD接收所述管理帧。具体地，在S310之前，所述第一MLD接收所述管理帧。比如，所述第一MLD接收第二MLD所发送的管理帧，如此，便于基于所述管理帧来执行所述第一监听操作；这里，在一示例中，所述管理帧还可以具体包括流量指示图TIM信标帧。
方式四：所述第一信息为目标初始控制帧，用于告知在所述目标初始控制帧之后发送组播帧。在一具体示例中，所述目标初始控制帧无需回复。
在一种实施方式中，在步骤S310之前，所述第一MLD接收所述目标初始控制帧，可以理解的是，所述目标初始控制帧是第二MLD在需要第一MLD执行所述第一监听操作的情况下发送的，这里，所述第二MLD为与所述第一MLD关联的MLD。比如，第二MLD在预期采用较高速率/较高MCS/较多SS/较高BW发送组播帧时，可以预先向第一MLD发送该目标初始控制帧，以告知所述在所述目标初始控制帧之后发送组播帧，使所述第一MLD执行第一监听操作，以便正常接收采用较高速率/较高MCS/较多SS/较高BW发送的组播帧。
在一种情况下，所述第一多链路设备MLD执行第一监听操作，具体为：所述第一MLD从第二监听操作切换至所述第一监听操作，更具体地，所述第一MLD在接收到所述目标初始控制帧之后，从第二监听操作切换至所述第一监听操作；或者，在另外一种情况下，所述第一MLD当前(即接收到所述目标初始控制帧时或之前)即处于所述第一监听操作下，此时无需进行切换，只需继续维持第一监听操作，也即继续执行所述第一监听操作即可。如此，来正常接收采用较高速率/较高MCS/较多SS/较高BW发送的组播帧。
在一种实施方式中，所述目标初始控制帧包括指示时长，所述指示时长为所述第一MLD切换至所述第一监听操作的最大可用时长。也就是说，在需要进行切换的情况下，所述第一MLD需要在最大可用时长内切换至第一监听操作，如此，以便于正常接收组播帧。进一步地，所述第一多链路设备MLD执行第一监听操作，具体为：所述第一MLD从第二监听操作切换至所述第一监听操作，更具体地，所述第一MLD在所述指示时长内从第二监听操作切换至所述第一监听操作；或者，在另外一种情况下，所述第一MLD当前即处于所述第一监听操作下，此时无需进行切换，只需继续维持第一监听操作，也即继续执行所述第一监听操作即可。
在一种实施方式中，所述目标初始控制帧为变体的多用户请求发送MU-RTS触发帧。进一步地， 所述变体的MU-RTS触发帧的触发类型子域的取值与MU-RTS触发帧的触发类型子域的取值不同。
在一种实施方式中，所述目标初始控制帧，比如变体的MU-RTS触发帧用于告知在所述MU-RTS触发帧之后发送组播帧。可以理解的是，所述变体的MU-RTS触发帧的目的是用于告知第一MLD在所述MU-RTS触发帧之后发送组播帧，且发送的组播帧采用了较高速率/较高MCS/较多SS/较高BW，因此，第一MLD在接收到变体的MU-RTS触发帧后，无需回复，只需要在该变体的MU-RTS触发帧所携带的指示时长内切换至第一监听操作即可，或者，第一MLD在接收到变体的MU-RTS触发帧时，即处于第一监听操作，此时，也无需回复，只需继续执行所述第一监听操作即可。
举例来说，工作在EMLSR模式下的AP MLD，当预期采用较高速率/较高MCS/较多SS/较高BW发送组播帧时，在发送该组播帧之前，可以预先发送无需回复的目标初始控制帧，比如变体的MU-RTS触发帧，以告知(如告知该工作在EMLSR模式下的AP MLD所关联的non-AP MLD，该non-AP MLD也工作在EMLSR模式下)在目标初始控制帧之后发送组播帧，且发送的组播帧采用了较高速率/较高MCS/较多SS/较高BW；同时，该目标初始控制帧可以通过携带指定的padding(位填充)时长(也即指示时长)，来确保工作在EMLSR模式下的该non-AP MLD，在EMLSR链路中的特定链路(也即发送组播帧的链路，比如第一链路)上有足够的时间提前切换到第一监听操作，以便于正常接收组播帧。
图4是根据本申请一实施例的通信方法400的示意性流程图。该方法可选地可以应用于图1所示的系统，但并不仅限于此。该方法包括以下内容的至少部分内容。
S410、第二多链路设备MLD发送第一信息，所述第一信息用于第一多链路设备MLD执行第一监听操作，所述第一监听操作用于所述第一MLD上的第一站点采用第一接收能力接收组播帧。
在一种实施方式中，所述第一MLD和第二MLD均为工作在EMLSR模式下的MLD。
在一种实施方式中，所述第二MLD为接入点AP MLD，所述第一MLD为与所述AP MLD对应的非接入点non-AP MLD。进一步地，第二MLD为工作在EMLSR模式下的MLD，所述第一MLD为工作在EMLSR模式下的、且关联于AP MLD(也即第二MLD)的非接入点non-AP MLD。
在一种实施方式中，所述第一站点为所述第一MLD的附属站点。具体地，所述第一站点为所述第一MLD上与第一链路对应的站点，所述第一站点用于监听所述第一链路，也就是说，所述第一监听操作用于所述第一站点处于监听状态，以对第一链路的信道状态进行监听。这里，所述第一站点也可称为监听站点。所述第一链路为发送所述组播帧的链路。
在一种实施方式中，所述第一链路为EMLSR链路中的链路。
也就是说，S410具体为：工作在EMLSR模式下的接入点AP MLD发送第一信息，所述第一信息用于非接入点non-AP MLD执行第一监听操作，其中，所述第一监听操作用于所述non-AP MLD上的第一站点(也即监听站点)监听EMLSR链路中的第一链路，以便于所述第一站点能够通过所述第一链路，并采用第一接收能力接收组播帧。这里，所述第一链路可以为与所述non-AP MLD所关联的AP MLD发送组播帧的链路。比如，所述AP MLD上的接入点AP(也即附属AP)可以通过所述第一链路发送组播帧。所述non-AP MLD也工作在EMLSR模式下。
例如，EMLSR链路中链路的两端分别对应non-AP MLD上的站点和AP MLD上的附属AP；该附属AP通过该链路发送组播帧，相应地，该站点通过该链路接收组播帧。也就是说，对于AP而言，一个AP对应一条链路，同时，也对应一个站点，AP通过自身对应的链路发送组播帧，相应地，该站点通过自身对应的该链路接收该组播帧。即站点、链路和AP，三者可以一一对应。
在一种实施方式中，所述第一接收能力大于或等于第二接收能力；所述第二接收能力为所述第一MLD在执行第二监听操作下所述第一站点采用的接收能力。比如，所述第一接收能力可以大于所述第二接收能力。
在一具体示例中，所述第一接收能力为EMLSR模式下的接收能力，也即所述第一接收能力为EMLSR模式下的第一MLD的附属的第一站点的接收能力，相应地，所述第二接收能力也为EMLSR模式下的接收能力，也即所述第二接收能力为EMLSR模式下的第一MLD的附属的第一站点的接收能力。
在一种实施方式中，所述第一接收能力包括以下至少之一：第一速率、第一调制与编码策略MCS、第一空间流SS以及第一带宽BW。
在另一种实施方式中，第二接收能力包括以下至少之一：第二速率、第二调制与编码策略MCS、第二空间流SS以及第二带宽BW；所述第二接收能力为第二监听操作下所述第一站点具有的接收能力。
这里，所述第一速率大于或等于第二速率；所述第一MCS优于或等于第二MCS；所述第一SS大于或等于第二SS；所述第一BW大于或等于第二BW。
需要说明的是，本申请方案对第一接收能力(或第二接收能力)所包含的参数的数量不作限制，比如，可以为以上参数中的一个、两个，或多个。相应地，所述第一接收能力所包含的参数与所述第二接 收能力所包含的参数，可以相同，也可以不同；所述第一接收能力所包含的参数的数量，与所述第二接收能力所包含的参数的数量，可以相同，也可以不同，本申请方案对此也不作限制。
可以理解的是，所述第一接收能力中至少一个参数(以上参数中的至少之一)大于第二接收能力所对应的参数，就可认为所述第一接收能力大于所述第二接收能力。举例来说，所述第一接收能力包括的第一速率大于第二接收能力所包括的第二速率，此时，若第一接收能力还包括其他参数，即便所述第一接收能力包括的其他参数等于所述第二接收能力所包括的对应参数，也可认为所述第一接收能力大于或可称优于所述第二接收能力。比如，所述第一接收能力包括的第一SS等于第二接收能力所包括的第二SS，此时，由于第一接收能力包括的第一速率大于第二接收能力所包括的第二速率，所以，依然可以认为第一接收能力大于所述第二接收能力。
在一种实施方式中，所述第一接收能力所包括的所有参数，均大于(或称为优于)第二接收能力所对应的参数。如此，以确保能够接收更多场景下的组播帧。具体来说，由于所述第一MLD上的第一站点具有第一接收能力(或者称为具有较优的第一接收能力)，所以，即便在无事先接收初始控制帧，比如MU-RTS触发帧的前提下，依然能够接收采用较高能力所发送的组播帧，比如，依然能够接收第二MLD采用较高速率，或较高MCS，或较高BW，或较多SS等发送的组播帧。
在一种实施方式中，所述第一监听操作下，所述第一MLD上，只有第一站点处于监听状态，而所述第一MLD上的其他站点均无法进入监听状态，也即不具有接收或发送帧的能力。
或者，在另一种实施方式中，所述第一MLD上还包括第二站点；所述第一监听操作还用于所述第二站点对所述EMLSR链路中的第二链路进行监听(也即使得所述第二站点处于监听状态)，所述第二链路为所述EMLSR链路中除所述第一链路以外的链路；进一步地，所述第二站点也具有所述第一接收能力。也就是说，所述第一监听操作下所述第一站点具有第一接收能力的情况下，所述第一MLD上的第二站点也可以处于监听状态，以对除第一链路之外的其他链路进行监听；此时，所述第二站点也可以具有所述第一接收能力。
具体地，所述第一多链路设备MLD执行第一监听操作为所述第一多链路设备MLD维持执行第一监听操作的情况下，所述第一监听操作还用于第二站点对所述EMLSR链路中的第二链路进行监听，所述第二站点为所述第一MLD上的站点，所述第二链路为所述EMLSR链路中除所述第一链路以外的链路；或者，在所述第一多链路设备MLD执行第一监听操作为所述第一多链路设备从第二监听操作切换至第一监听操作的情况下，所述第一监听操作使得所述第二站点无法进行监听。
可以理解的是，该实施方式中，所述第一监听操作下所述第一站点具有第一接收能力的情况下，所述第一MLD上处于唤醒状态的第二站点可以为一个，也可以为多个，本申请方案对此不作限制。比如，所述第一监听操作下所述第一站点具有第一接收能力的情况下，所述第一MLD上处于唤醒状态的所有第二站点均可以处于监听状态，且所有第二站点均具有第一接收能力。
举例来说，所述第一监听操作(也即EMLSR模式下的第一监听操作)可以具体指：工作在EMLSR模式下的non-AP MLD上，与EMLSR链路中特定链路(比如第一链路)所对应的附属站点(简称监听站点，比如第一站点)，能够接收采用较高速率/较高MCS/较多SS/较高BW发送的组播帧。进一步地，所述non-AP MLD进入EMLSR模式下的第一监听操作存在两种情况：
情况一：第一监听操作下，能够使得附属站点(比如第一站点)进入EMLSR链路中特定链路(比如第一链路)的帧交换处理对应的监听状态；也就是说，第一监听操作下，特定链路(比如第一链路)所对应的附属站点(比如第一站点)帧的接收能力(也可称为帧的处理能力)，与该特定链路进行帧交换处理的能力一致，也即能够接收采用较高速率/较高MCS/较多SS/较高BW发送的组播帧。而且，在这种状态下，EMLSR链路中除对特定链路(比如第一链路)外的其他链路无法进行监听，也即除特定链路外的其他链路无法发送或接收帧。例如，该情况中，可通过切换合并链路的方式，把EMLSR链路中的收发能力(比如把EMLSR链路中其他站点的收发能力)合并到第一站点上，使得第一站点具有较强的第一接收能力。
情况二：第一监听操作下，EMLSR模式下的特定链路(比如第一链路)所在的附属站点(比如第一站点)本身具备接收采用较高速率/较高MCS/较高BW/较多SS发送的组播帧的能力，因此，可保持EMLSR链路中所有处于唤醒状态的附属站点(比如第二站点)均处于监听状态。此时，处于唤醒状态的附属站点(比如第二站点)可以与第一站点的接收能力相同，也可以不同，本申请方案对此不作限制，只要第一站点具有接收采用较高速率/较高MCS/较高BW/较多SS发送的组播帧的能力，均属于本申请方案的保护范围。可以理解的是，由于该情况中未进行切换合并链路，所以，此时的第一站点的接收能力，可能会弱于切换合并链路后的接收能力。
在一种实施方式中，所述第二监听操作用于所述第一MLD上的目标站点(也即第一MLD的附属站点)对所述目标站点所对应的链路进行监听，其中，所述目标站点为所述第一MLD上处于唤醒状态 的站点，所述目标站点具有所述第二接收能力，如所述第二接收能力包括如下至少之一：进行空闲信道评估CCA，接收用于发起帧交换的初始控制帧。又比如，当所述第一MLD上存在两个或两个以上处于唤醒状态的目标站点，此时，所述第二监听操作均能够使得第一MLD上的两个或两个以上的目标站点具有第二接收能力。也就是说，在所述第二监听操作下，所述第一MLD上处于唤醒状态的附属站点，比如一个，或者多个，或者所有处于唤醒状态的附属站点，均能够处于监听状态，且该处于监听状态的附属站点均具有第二接收能力，比如相对于第一接收能力而言，具有较低的第二接收能力。
举例来说，第二监听操作(也即EMLSR模式下的第一监听操作)可以具体指：工作在EMLSR模式下的non-AP MLD上，与EMLSR链路对应的所有处于唤醒状态的附属站点(也即目标站点)，均处于监听状态；其中，所述EMLSR链路对应的每个站点的接收能力，也即第二接收能力，是受限的，除了能够进行CCA、或MU-RTS触发帧等初始控制帧的接收外，对于其他类型的帧而言，因受限于速率/MCS/SS/BW等能力而导致无法正确接收。
在一种实施方式中，所述第二MLD发送所述组播帧，具体地，所述第二MLD，在所述第一MLD执行第一监听操作所监听的第一链路上，发送所述组播帧；更具体地，所述第二MLD的附属AP，在所述第一MLD执行第一监听操作所监听的第一链路上，发送所述组播帧。相应地，所述第一MLD通过采用监听所述第一链路的、且具有第一接收能力的所述第一站点接收所述组播帧。
在一种实施方式中，第二MLD发送的所述组播帧由物理层协议数据单元PPDU携带，所述PPDU包括以下至少之一：
正交频分复用OFDM物理层协议数据单元PPDU；
非高吞吐量non-HT复制DUP PPDU；
极高吞吐量VHT PPDU；
高吞吐量HT PPDU；
高效率HE单用户SU PPDU；
极高吞吐量EHT多用户MU PPDU在内的极高吞吐量EHT站点STA所支持的PPDU。
相应地，所述第一MLD通过采用所述第一接收能力的所述第一站点接收所述组播帧。举例来说，工作在EMLSR模式下的AP MLD的附属AP，在EMLSR链路中特定链路(也即第一链路)上，采用以下参数至少之一发送携带有组播帧的PPDU；相应地，工作在EMLSR模式下的non-AP MLD，在EMLSR链路中该特定链路(也即第一链路)所对应的附属站点(比如具有第一接收能力的第一站点)，能够正常接收所述AP MLD的附属AP所发送的PPDU；这里，所述参数包括：较高速率，较高MCS，较多SS和较高BW。
在一种实施方式中，所述第二MLD在以下时间点发送所述组播帧，也即第二MLD通过附属AP在以下时间点发送所述组播帧；具体时间点包括：
(1)预期的组播帧发送时间点；这里，所述预期的组播帧发送时间点可以为预先约定的任意时间点，本申请方案对此不作限制。举例来说，AP MLD的附属AP在预期的组播帧发送时间点调度发送缓存的组播帧。
(2)在发送传输流量指示图DTIM信标帧之后的时间点；也即预期的组播帧发送时间点晚于发送DTIM信标帧的TBTT。举例来说，AP MLD的附属AP在发送DTIM信标帧(beacon)之后调度发送缓存的组播帧；比如，在每个DTIM信标帧(beacon)之后调度发送缓存的组播帧。
(3)在广播目标唤醒时间TWT服务周期SP内的时间点；也就是说，所述预期的组播帧发送时间点位于所述广播TWT服务周期SP内。举例来说，AP MLD的附属AP在广播TWT服务周期SP内调度发送组播帧；比如，AP MLD的一个附属AP为TWT调度AP(TWT scheduling AP)，TWT调度AP在位于发送DTIM信标帧所在的信标间隔(beacon interval)期间的广播TWT服务周期SP内调度发送缓存的组播帧。
(4)在特定灵活多播服务FMS流的FMS计数器域当前计数值为零的非空时分组码non-STBC DTIM信标帧的TBTT之后的时间点；也就是说，所述预期的组播帧发送时间点晚于FMS流的FMS计数器域当前计数值为零的non-STBC DTIM信标帧的TBTT。举例来说，在特定灵活多播服务FMS流的FMS计数器域当前计数值为零的非空时分组码non-STBC DTIM信标帧的TBTT之后的时间点，调度发送缓存的组播帧。
(5)带重试的组播GCR服务周期内。也就是说，所述预期的组播帧发送时间点位于所述GCR服务周期内。举例来说在GCR服务周期内，调度发送缓存的组播帧。
在一种实施方式中，所述第二MLD发送的、且用于使第一多链路设备MLD执行第一监听操作的第一信息，可以采用如下几种方式得到：
方式一：所述第一信息用于所述第一MLD在目标时间或目标时间之前执行所述第一监听操作。也 即所述第一MLD能够基于第一信息使得所述第一MLD在目标时间或目标时间之前执行所述第一监听操作。
可以理解的是，在一示例中，所述第一信息包含目标时间，此时，所述第一信息用于所述第一MLD在所述第一信息所包含的目标时间或目标时间之前执行所述第一监听操作。或者，在另一示例中，所述第一信息不包含目标时间，此时，所述目标时间是第二MLD预先发送至第一MLD，也即是第一MLD预先接收的，此时，所述第一信息用于所述第一MLD在预先获取的目标时间或目标时间之前执行所述第一监听操作。本申请方案，对目标时间是否携带于第一信息中不作限制，只要所述第一信息能够使得第一MLD在目标时间或目标时间之前执行所述第一监听操作，均属于本申请方案的保护范围。
在一种实施方式中，第一信息用于所述第一MLD在目标时间或目标时间之前执行所述第一监听操作，可以具体包括：第一信息用于所述第一MLD在目标时间或目标时间之前，从第二监听操作切换至所述第一监听操作，或者，在接收到第一信息的情况下，所述第一MLD即在第一监听操作下，此时，只需继续执行第一监听操作即可。
在一种实施方式中，该方式一中所述目标时间包括第一时间点，所述第一时间点可以具体包括以下至少之一：
(1)预期的组播帧发送时间点。此时，所述第一MLD在预期的组播帧发送时间点，或者在预期的组播帧发送时间点之前的时间点，执行所述第一监听操作；这里，所述预期的组播帧发送时间点可以为预先约定的任意时间点，本申请方案对此不作限制。
(2)预期的传输流量指示图DTIM信标帧的目标信标发送时间TBTT；这里，所述预期的组播帧发送时间点晚于所述DTIM信标帧的TBTT。此时，所述第一MLD在预期的DTIM信标帧的TBTT，或者在预期的DTIM信标帧的TBTT之前的时间点，执行所述第一监听操作。
(3)预期发送组播帧的广播目标唤醒时间TWT服务周期SP的起始时间；这里，所述预期的组播帧发送时间点位于所述广播TWT服务周期SP内。此时，所述第一MLD在预期发送组播帧的广播目标唤醒时间TWT服务周期SP的起始时间，或者所述起始时间之前的时间点，执行所述第一监听操作。
(4)特定灵活多播服务FMS流的FMS计数器域当前计数值为零的非空时分组码non-STBC DTIM信标帧的TBTT；这里，所述预期的组播帧发送时间点晚于FMS流的FMS计数器域当前计数值为零的non-STBC DTIM信标帧的TBTT。此时，所述第一MLD在特定FMS流的FMS计数器域当前计数值为零的non-STBC DTIM信标帧的TBTT，或者，在特定FMS流的FMS计数器域当前计数值为零的non-STBC DTIM信标帧的TBTT之前的时间点，执行所述第一监听操作。
(5)预期发送组播帧的带重试的组播GCR服务周期的起始时间；这里，所述预期的组播帧发送时间点位于所述GCR服务周期内。此时，所述第一MLD在预期发送组播帧的带重试的组播GCR服务周期的起始时间，或者该起始时间之前的时间点，执行所述第一监听操作。
可以理解的是，对于接收端，也即第一MLD端而言的具体示例，可以参照以上描述，这里不再赘述。
在一种实施方式中，所述第一时间点是所述第二MLD确定的；进一步地，所述第一时间点是所述第二MLD预先发送至所述第一MLD的；比如，是在步骤S410之前，所述第二MLD将所述第一时间点发送至所述第一MLD，以确保所述第一MLD在预期的组播帧发送之前提前执行第一监听操作，以使第一站点对EMLSR链路中调度发送组播帧所在链路进行监听。
方式二：所述第一信息为DTIM信标帧，也即步骤S410具体为：第二MLD发送DTIM信标帧，所述DTIM信标帧用于所述第一MLD在目标时间或目标时间之前执行所述第一监听操作。
可以理解的是，在一示例中，所述DTIM信标帧可以包含目标时间(比如第二时间点)，也即携带目标时间，此时，所述DTIM信标帧用于所述第一MLD在所述DTIM信标帧所携带的目标时间或目标时间之前执行所述第一监听操作。或者，在另一示例中，所述DTIM信标帧不包含目标时间，也即不携带目标时间；此时，所述目标时间是第二MLD预先发送至第一MLD，也即是第一MLD预先接收的，进一步地，所述DTIM信标帧用于所述第一MLD在预先获取的目标时间或目标时间之前执行所述第一监听操作。本申请方案，对目标时间是否携带于DTIM信标帧中不作限制，只要DTIM信标帧能够使得第一MLD在目标时间或目标时间之前执行所述第一监听操作，均属于本申请方案的保护范围。
在一种实施方式中，与方式一不同的是，该方式二中所述目标时间包括第二时间点；进一步地，所述DTIM信标帧用于所述第一MLD在所述第二时间点或所述第二时间点之前从第二监听操作切换至所述第一监听操作。
进一步地，所述第二时间点包括：所述第一MLD接收完DTIM信标帧之后的预期的组播帧发送时间点；这里，所述DTIM信标帧是所述第一MLD在第二监听操作下所接收的。也就是说，预期的组播帧发送时间点是位于发送DTIM信标帧的时间点之后，此时，所述第一MLD先接收DTIM信标帧，并 在接收完DTIM信标帧之后的预期的组播帧发送时间点，或者，在接收完DTIM信标帧之后的预期的组播帧发送时间点之前执行所述第一监听操作。可以理解的是，在第一MLD在接收完DTIM信标帧的时间点即可执行所述第一监听操作。
举例来说，工作在EMLSR模式下的AP MLD，在EMLSR链路中的特定链路(比如第一链路)上发送DTIM信标帧；此时，工作在EMLSR模式的non-AP MLD(与该AP MLD关联)，准备在EMLSR链路中的该链路(比如第一链路)上接收组播帧时，可以先在DTIM信标帧的TBTT之前进入第二监听操作，并在接收完DTIM信标帧之后、且在预期的组播帧调度发送的时间点之前，从所述第二监听操作切换进入第一监听操作，使得所述第一MLD的第一站点对EMLSR链路中组播帧调度发送所在链路(比如第一链路)进行监听，这里，所述第一监听操作下，所述第一站点具有第一接收能力，如此，确保能够正常接收组播帧。
可以理解的是，AP MLD在EMLSR链路上发送DTIM信标帧之后，且在调度发送组播帧的起始时间点之前，需要预留足够的时长，如此，可以确保工作在EMLSR模式下的、该AP MLD所关联的non-AP MLD，在接收完DTIM信标帧之后并在组播帧发送的时间点或组播帧发送的时间点之前，切换进入EMLSR链路中组播帧调度发送所在链路(比如第一链路)的第一监听操作。
方式三：所述第一信息是基于第一指示确定的；所述第一指示用于指示在需要接收组播帧的情况下是否执行所述第一监听操作。比如，所述第一指示具体用于指示在需要接收组播帧的情况下执行所述第一监听操作，或者，指示在需要接收组播帧的情况下无需执行所述第一监听操作。进一步地，该方式三中，所述第一指示可以通过如下两种方式来表达，分别包括：
第一种方式：
所述第一指示用于统一指示接入点AP对应的第一MLD在需要接收组播帧的情况下是否执行所述第一监听操作；这里，所述接入点AP为与所述第一MLD所关联的第二MLD对应的AP；所述第二MLD对应的AP包括以下至少之一：第二MLD的附属AP，所述第二MLD的附属AP所在多BSSID集中BSSID所指的AP。
例如，所述接入点AP对应的第一MLD，可以具体为：接入点AP对应的第一站点所对应的第一MLD；可以理解的是，链路，比如EMLSR链路中链路的两端，分别对应的是第一MLD上的第一站点和第二MLD对应的接入点AP，而且，站点、链路和AP三者可以一一对应，基于此，与接入点AP所对应的是站点，而站点与第一MLD相对应。
需要说明的是，所述第一指示中不携带目标时间，比如，不携带第一时间点，所述第一指示的目的是指示在需要接收组播的情况下是否需要执行第一监听操作。基于此，所述第一时间点可以是第一MLD通过其他方式提前获取到的，本申请方案对此不作具体限制。或者，在另外一种情况下，所述第一指示不仅指示在需要接收组播的情况下是否需要执行第一监听操作，还可以携带目标时间，比如第一时间点，此时，无需第一MLD提前去获取第一时间点。实际应用中，上述两种方式可以择一执行，本申请方案不作限制。
在一种实施方式中，所述第一指示的取值为第一值(比如为1)的情况下，用于统一指示接入点AP对应的第一MLD在需要接收组播帧的情况下执行所述第一监听操作；
或者，所述第一指示的取值为第二值(比如为0)的情况下，用于统一指示接入点AP对应的第一MLD在需要接收组播帧的情况下无需执行所述第一监听操作。
在一种实施方式中，所述第一指示由EMLSR操作指示元素携带。进一步地，所述第一指示由EMLSR操作指示元素中的第一字段携带。
在一种实施方式中，所述第一字段包括第二指示；所述第二指示的取值为第三值(比如为1)的情况下，所述第一字段包括所述第一指示。
在一种实施方式中，所述第一字段为EMLSR操作指示位图控制。所述第一指示为EMLSR操作统一指示。进一步地，所述第二指示为EMLSR操作统一指示存在；其中，所述EMLSR操作统一指示存在用于指示第一字段(也即EMLSR操作指示位图控制)中是否包括EMLSR操作统一指示。
可以理解的是，实际应用中，所述EMLSR操作指示元素中还可以包括其他字段，本申请方案对所包含的字段不作具体限制。
在一种实施方式中，所述EMLSR操作指示元素由管理帧携带。此时，所述第一信息可以具体为管理帧。进一步地，所述第一MLD接收所述管理帧。具体地，在S310之前，所述第一MLD接收所述管理帧。比如，所述第一MLD接收第二MLD所发送的管理帧，如此，便于基于所述管理帧来执行第一监听操作；这里，在一示例中，所述管理帧包括流量指示图TIM信标帧。
第二种方式：
所述第一指示中每一位的位置，用于指示接入点AP；
所述第一指示中每一位的值，用于指示接入点AP对应的第一MLD在需要接收组播帧的情况下是否执行所述第一监听操作。
这里，所述接入点AP为与所述第一MLD所关联的第二MLD对应的AP；所述第二MLD对应的AP包括以下至少之一：第二MLD的附属AP，所述第二MLD的附属AP所在多BSSID集中BSSID所指的AP。
例如，所述接入点AP对应的第一MLD，可以具体为：接入点AP对应的第一站点所对应的第一MLD；可以理解的是，链路，比如EMLSR链路中链路的两端，分别对应的是第一MLD上的第一站点和第二MLD对应的接入点AP，而且，站点、链路和AP三者可以一一对应，基于此，与接入点AP所对应的是站点，而站点与第一MLD相对应。
需要说明的是，所述第一指示中不携带目标时间，比如，不携带第一时间点，所述第一指示的目的是指示在需要接收组播的情况下是否需要执行第一监听操作。基于此，所述第一时间点可以是第一MLD通过其他方式提前获取到的，本申请方案对此不作具体限制。或者，在另外一种情况下，所述第一指示不仅指示在需要接收组播的情况下是否需要执行第一监听操作，还可以携带目标时间，比如第一时间点，此时，无需第一MLD提前去获取第一时间点。实际应用中，上述两种方式可以择一执行，本申请方案不作限制。
在一种实施方式中，所述第一指示中每一位的取值为第四值(比如1)的情况下，用于指示接入点AP对应的第一MLD在需要接收组播帧的情况下执行所述第一监听操作；
或者，所述第一指示中每一位的取值为第五值(比如0)的情况下，用于指示接入点AP对应的第一MLD在需要接收组播帧的情况下无需执行所述第一监听操作。
在一种实施方式中，所述第一指示由EMLSR操作指示元素携带。进一步地，所述第一指示由EMLSR操作指示元素中的第二字段携带。
在一种实施方式中，所述第二字段为部分EMLSR操作指示位图；所述部分EMLSR操作指示位图是通过截取EMLSR操作指示位图中部分连续比特而形成的。
在一种实施方式中，所述EMLSR操作指示元素包括第一字段；其中，所述第一字段中的第二指示的取值为第六值(比如为0)的情况下，所述第一字段包括第三指示；所述第三指示用于指示从所述EMLSR操作指示位图中截取的部分连续比特的位置。在一种实施方式中，所述第三指示为位图偏移量，这样，基于所述位图偏移量即可从所述EMLSR操作指示位图中截取得到所述部分EMLSR操作指示位图。
在一种实施方式中，所述第一字段为EMLSR操作指示位图控制。所述第一指示为EMLSR操作统一指示。进一步地，所述第二指示为EMLSR操作统一指示存在；其中，所述EMLSR操作统一指示存在用于指示第一字段(也即EMLSR操作指示位图控制)中是否包括EMLSR操作统一指示。举例来说，所述EMLSR操作统一指示存在的取值为第三值(比如为1)的情况下，所述EMLSR操作指示位图控制包括所述EMLSR操作统一指示，此时，还可以包括预留。该情况下，通过所述EMLSR操作统一指示来统一指示相应的第一MLD是否需要执行第一监听操作。进一步地，所述EMLSR操作统一指示存在的取值为第六值(比如为0)的情况下，所述EMLSR操作指示位图控制包括所述位图偏移量。此时，所述EMLSR操作指示元素中还需要包括部分EMLSR操作指示位图，进而通过部分EMLSR操作指示位图来指示相应的第一MLD是否需要执行第一监听操作。
可以理解的是，实际应用中，所述EMLSR操作指示元素中还可以包括其他字段，本申请方案对所包含的字段不作具体限制。
在一种实施方式中，所述EMLSR操作指示元素由管理帧携带。此时，所述第一信息可以具体为管理帧。进一步地，所述第一MLD接收所述管理帧。具体地，在S310之前，所述第一MLD接收所述管理帧。比如，所述第一MLD接收第二MLD所发送的管理帧，如此，便于基于所述管理帧来执行所述第一监听操作；这里，在一示例中，所述管理帧还可以具体包括流量指示图TIM信标帧。
可以理解的是，该第一种方式和第二种方式的具体示例，可参见第一MLD相关的示例，此处不再赘述。
方式四：所述第一信息为目标初始控制帧，用于告知在所述目标初始控制帧之后发送组播帧。在一具体示例中，所述目标初始控制帧无需回复。
在一种实施方式中，所述目标初始控制帧是第二MLD在需要第一MLD执行所述第一监听操作的情况下发送的，这里，所述第二MLD为与所述第一MLD关联的MLD。比如，第二MLD在预期采用较高速率/较高MCS/较多SS/较高BW发送组播帧时，可以预先向第一MLD发送该目标初始控制帧，以告知所述在所述目标初始控制帧之后发送组播帧，使所述第一MLD执行第一监听操作，以便正常接收采用较高速率/较高MCS/较多SS/较高BW发送的组播帧。
在一种情况下，所述第一多链路设备MLD执行第一监听操作，具体为：所述第一MLD从第二监听操作切换至所述第一监听操作，更具体地，所述第一MLD在接收到所述目标初始控制帧之后，从第二监听操作切换至所述第一监听操作；或者，在另外一种情况下，所述第一MLD当前(即接收到所述目标初始控制帧时或之前)即处于所述第一监听操作下，此时无需进行切换，只需继续维持第一监听操作，也即继续执行所述第一监听操作即可。如此，来正常接收采用较高速率/较高MCS/较多SS/较高BW发送的组播帧。
在一种实施方式中，所述目标初始控制帧包括指示时长，所述指示时长为所述第一MLD切换至所述第一监听操作的最大可用时长。比如，在需要第一MLD执行第一监听操作的情况下，所述第二MLD发送所述目标初始控制帧，使得所述第一MLD在需要进行切换的时候在最大可用时长内切换至第一监听操作，如此，便于所述第一MLD正常接收组播帧。
在一种实施方式中，所述目标初始控制帧为变体的多用户请求发送MU-RTS触发帧。进一步地，所述变体的MU-RTS触发帧的触发类型子域的取值与MU-RTS触发帧的触发类型子域的取值不同。
在一种实施方式中，所述目标初始控制帧，比如变体的MU-RTS触发帧用于告知在所述MU-RTS触发帧之后发送组播帧。可以理解的是，所述变体的MU-RTS触发帧的目的是用于告知第一MLD在所述MU-RTS触发帧之后发送组播帧，且发送的组播帧采用了较高速率/较高MCS/较多SS/较高BW，因此，第一MLD在接收到变体的MU-RTS触发帧后，无需回复，只需要在该变体的MU-RTS触发帧所携带的指示时长内切换至第一监听操作即可，或者，第一MLD在接收到变体的MU-RTS触发帧时，即处于第一监听操作，此时，也无需回复，只需继续执行所述第一监听操作即可。
举例来说，工作在EMLSR模式下的AP MLD，当预期采用较高速率/较高MCS/较多SS/较高BW发送组播帧时，在发送该组播帧之前，可以预先发送无需回复的目标初始控制帧，比如变体的MU-RTS触发帧，以告知(如告知该工作在EMLSR模式下的AP MLD所关联的non-AP MLD，该non-AP MLD也工作在EMLSR模式下)在目标初始控制帧之后发送组播帧，且发送的组播帧采用了较高速率/较高MCS/较多SS/较高BW；同时，该目标初始控制帧可以通过携带指定的padding(位填充)时长(也即指示时长)，来确保工作在EMLSR模式下的该non-AP MLD，在EMLSR链路中的特定链路(也即发送组播帧的链路，比如第一链路)上有足够的时间提前切换到第一监听操作，以便于正常接收组播帧。
本申请方案还提供了一种第一多链路设备，如图5所示，第一多链路设备500包括：
处理单元510，用于执行第一监听操作，其中，所述第一监听操作用于所述第一MLD上的第一站点采用第一接收能力接收组播帧。
在一种实施方式中，其中，
所述第一接收能力大于或等于第二接收能力，所述第二接收能力为所述第一MLD在执行第二监听操作下所述第一站点采用的接收能力。
在一种实施方式中，所述处理单元，具体用于基于第一信息执行第一监听操作。
在一种实施方式中，所述第一信息用于所述第一MLD在目标时间或目标时间之前执行所述第一监听操作。
在一种实施方式中，所述目标时间包括第一时间点，所述第一时间点包括以下至少之一：
预期的组播帧发送时间点；
预期的传输流量指示图DTIM信标帧的目标信标发送时间TBTT；
预期发送组播帧的广播目标唤醒时间TWT服务周期SP的起始时间；
特定灵活多播服务FMS流的FMS计数器域当前计数值为零的非空时分组码non-STBC DTIM信标帧的TBTT；
预期发送组播帧的带重试的组播GCR服务周期的起始时间。
在一种实施方式中，所述第一时间点是所述第一MLD预先接收到的。
在一种实施方式中，所述第一信息为传输流量指示图DTIM信标帧，所述DTIM信标帧用于所述第一MLD在目标时间或目标时间之前执行所述第一监听操作。
在一种实施方式中，所述目标时间包括第二时间点，所述第二时间点包括：接收完传输流量指示图DTIM信标帧之后的预期的组播帧发送时间点；所述DTIM信标帧是所述第一MLD在第二监听操作下所接收的。
在一种实施方式中，所述处理单元510，具体用于在所述第二时间点或第二时间点之前从所述第二监听操作切换至所述第一监听操作；所述第二监听操作是所述第一MLD在预期传输的DTIM信标帧的目标信标发送时间TBTT之前所执行的。
在一种实施方式中，所述第一信息是基于第一指示确定的；所述第一指示用于指示在需要接收组 播帧的情况下是否执行所述第一监听操作。
在一种实施方式中，所述第一指示用于统一指示接入点AP对应的第一MLD在需要接收组播帧的情况下是否执行所述第一监听操作；
所述接入点AP为与所述第一MLD所关联的第二MLD对应的AP；所述第二MLD对应的AP包括以下至少之一：
第二MLD的附属AP，所述第二MLD的附属AP所在多BSSID集中BSSID所指的AP。
在一种实施方式中，所述第一指示的取值为第一值的情况下，用于统一指示接入点AP对应的第一MLD在需要接收组播帧的情况下执行所述第一监听操作；
或者，所述第一指示的取值为第二值的情况下，用于统一指示接入点AP对应的第一MLD在需要接收组播帧的情况下无需执行所述第一监听操作。
在一种实施方式中，所述第一指示由EMLSR操作指示元素携带。
在一种实施方式中，所述第一指示由EMLSR操作指示元素中的第一字段携带。
在一种实施方式中，所述第一字段包括第二指示；
所述第二指示的取值为第三值的情况下，所述第一字段包括所述第一指示。
在一种实施方式中，所述第一指示为EMLSR操作统一指示。
在一种实施方式中，所述第一指示中每一位的位置，用于指示接入点AP；所述接入点AP为与所述第一MLD所关联的第二MLD对应的AP；所述第二MLD对应的AP包括以下至少之一：第二MLD的附属AP，所述第二MLD的附属AP所在多BSSID集中BSSID所指的AP；
所述第一指示中每一位的值，用于指示接入点AP对应的第一MLD在需要接收组播帧的情况下是否执行所述第一监听操作。
在一种实施方式中，所述第一指示中每一位的取值为第四值的情况下，用于指示接入点AP对应的第一MLD在需要接收组播帧的情况下执行所述第一监听操作；
或者，所述第一指示中每一位的取值为第五值的情况下，用于指示接入点AP对应的第一MLD在需要接收组播帧的情况下无需执行所述第一监听操作。
在一种实施方式中，所述第一指示由EMLSR操作指示元素携带。
在一种实施方式中，所述第一指示由EMLSR操作指示元素中的第二字段携带。
在一种实施方式中，所述第二字段为部分EMLSR操作指示位图；所述部分EMLSR操作指示位图是通过截取EMLSR操作指示位图中部分连续比特而形成的。
在一种实施方式中，所述EMLSR操作指示元素包括第一字段；
所述第一字段中的第二指示的取值为第六值的情况下，所述第一字段包括第三指示；所述第三指示用于指示从所述EMLSR操作指示位图中截取的部分连续比特的位置。
在一种实施方式中，所述第三指示为位图偏移量。
在一种实施方式中，所述第二指示为EMLSR操作统一指示存在；其中，所述EMLSR操作统一指示存在用于指示第一字段中是否包括EMLSR操作统一指示。
在一种实施方式中，所述第一字段为EMLSR操作指示位图控制。
在一种实施方式中，所述EMLSR操作指示元素由管理帧携带。
在一种实施方式中，所述管理帧包括流量指示图TIM信标帧。
在一种实施方式中，还包括：
第一接收单元，用于接收所述管理帧。
在一种实施方式中，所述第一信息为目标初始控制帧，用于告知在所述目标初始控制帧之后发送组播帧。
在一种实施方式中，所述目标初始控制帧包括指示时长，所述指示时长为所述第一MLD切换至所述第一监听操作的最大可用时长。
在一种实施方式中，所述目标初始控制帧为变体的多用户请求发送MU-RTS触发帧。
在一种实施方式中，所述变体的MU-RTS触发帧的触发类型子域的取值与MU-RTS触发帧的触发类型子域的取值不同。
在一种实施方式中，还包括：
第二接收单元，用于接收所述目标初始控制帧，所述目标初始控制帧是第二MLD在需要第一MLD执行所述第一监听操作的情况下发送的，所述第二MLD为与所述第一MLD关联的MLD。
在一种实施方式中，所述处理单元，具体用于：从第二监听操作切换至所述第一监听操作；或者，维持执行所述第一监听操作。
在一种实施方式中，所述第一接收能力包括以下至少之一：第一速率、第一调制与编码策略MCS、 第一空间流SS以及第一带宽BW；
和/或，第二接收能力包括以下至少之一：第二速率、第二调制与编码策略MCS、第二空间流SS以及第二带宽BW；所述第二接收能力为第二监听操作下所述第一站点具有的接收能力；
其中，所述第一速率大于或等于第二速率；所述第一MCS优于或等于第二MCS；所述第一SS大于或等于第二SS；所述第一BW大于或等于第二BW。
在一种实施方式中，所述第二监听操作用于所述第一MLD上的目标站点对所述目标站点所对应的链路进行监听，其中，所述目标站点为所述第一MLD上处于唤醒状态的站点，所述目标站点具有所述第二接收能力；所述第二接收能力包括如下至少之一：进行空闲信道评估CCA，接收用于发起帧交换的初始控制帧。
在一种实施方式中，还包括：
第三接收单元，用于通过采用所述第一接收能力的所述第一站点接收所述组播帧。
在一种实施方式中，采用所述第一接收能力接收的所述组播帧由物理层协议数据单元PPDU携带，所述PPDU包括以下至少之一：
正交频分复用OFDM物理层协议数据单元PPDU；
非高吞吐量non-HT复制DUP PPDU；
极高吞吐量VHT PPDU；
高吞吐量HT PPDU；
高效率HE单用户SU PPDU；
极高吞吐量EHT多用户MU PPDU在内的极高吞吐量EHT站点STA所支持的PPDU。
在一种实施方式中，还包括：
所述处理单元，还用于在所述组播帧接收完成的情况下，从所述第一监听操作切换至第二监听操作。
在一种实施方式中，所述第一站点为所述第一MLD上与第一链路对应的站点，所述第一站点用于监听所述第一链路；所述第一链路为发送所述组播帧的链路。
在一种实施方式中，所述第一MLD为工作在增强多链路单无线EMLSR模式下的MLD，所述第一链路为EMLSR链路中的链路。
在一种实施方式中，所述第一MLD为非接入点non-AP MLD。
在一种实施方式中，所述第一多链路设备MLD执行第一监听操作为所述第一多链路设备MLD维持执行第一监听操作的情况下，所述第一监听操作还用于第二站点对所述EMLSR链路中的第二链路进行监听，所述第二站点为所述第一MLD上的站点，所述第二链路为所述EMLSR链路中除所述第一链路以外的链路；
或者，
在所述第一多链路设备MLD执行第一监听操作为所述第一多链路设备从第二监听操作切换至第一监听操作的情况下，所述第一监听操作使得所述第二站点无法进行监听。
本申请实施例的第一多链路设备500能够实现前述的方法实施例中的第一多链路设备的对应功能。该第一多链路设备500中的各个模块(子模块、单元或组件等)对应的流程、功能、实现方式以及有益效果，可参见上述方法实施例中的对应描述，在此不再赘述。需要说明，关于申请实施例的第一多链路设备500中的各个模块(子模块、单元或组件等)所描述的功能，可以由不同的模块(子模块、单元或组件等)实现，也可以由同一个模块(子模块、单元或组件等)实现。
本申请方案还提供了一种第二多链路设备，如图6所示，第二多链路设备600包括：
发送单元610，用于发送第一信息，所述第一信息用于第一多链路设备MLD执行第一监听操作，所述第一监听操作用于所述第一MLD上的第一站点采用第一接收能力接收组播帧。
在一种实施方式中，所述第一接收能力大于或等于第二接收能力，所述第二接收能力为第二监听操作所指示的所述第一MLD上的第一站点采用的接收能力，所述第二监听操作为所述第一MLD能够执行的监听操作。
在一种实施方式中，所述第一信息用于所述第一MLD在目标时间或目标时间之前执行所述第一监听操作。
在一种实施方式中，所述目标时间包括第一时间点，所述第一时间点包括以下至少之一：
预期的组播帧发送时间点；
预期的传输流量指示图DTIM信标帧的目标信标发送时间TBTT；
预期发送组播帧的广播目标唤醒时间TWT服务周期SP的起始时间；
特定灵活多播服务FMS流的FMS计数器域当前计数值为零的非空时分组码non-STBC DTIM信 标帧的TBTT；
预期发送组播帧的带重试的组播GCR服务周期的起始时间。
在一种实施方式中，所述第一时间点是所述第二MLD确定的。
在一种实施方式中，所述第一信息为传输流量指示图DTIM信标帧，所述DTIM信标帧用于所述第一MLD在目标时间或目标时间之前执行所述第一监听操作。
在一种实施方式中，所述目标时间包括第二时间点，所述第二时间点包括：所述第一MLD接收完DTIM信标帧之后的预期的组播帧发送时间点；所述DTIM信标帧是所述第一MLD在第二监听操作下所接收的。
在一种实施方式中，所述DTIM信标帧用于所述第一MLD在所述第二时间点或所述第二时间点之前从第二监听操作切换至所述第一监听操作。
在一种实施方式中，所述第一信息是基于第一指示确定的；所述第一指示用于指示在需要接收组播帧的情况下是否执行所述第一监听操作。
在一种实施方式中，所述第一指示用于统一指示接入点AP对应的第一MLD在需要接收组播帧的情况下是否执行所述第一监听操作；
所述接入点AP为与所述第一MLD所关联的第二MLD对应的AP；所述第二MLD对应的AP包括以下至少之一：
第二MLD的附属AP，所述第二MLD的附属AP所在多BSSID集中BSSID所指的AP。
在一种实施方式中，所述第一指示的取值为第一值的情况下，用于统一指示接入点AP对应的第一MLD在需要接收组播帧的情况下执行所述第一监听操作；
或者，所述第一指示的取值为第二值的情况下，用于统一指示接入点AP对应的第一MLD在需要接收组播帧的情况下无需执行所述第一监听操作。
在一种实施方式中，所述第一指示由EMLSR操作指示元素携带。
在一种实施方式中，所述第一指示由EMLSR操作指示元素中的第一字段携带。
在一种实施方式中，所述第一字段包括第二指示；
所述第二指示的取值为第三值的情况下，所述第一字段包括所述第一指示。
在一种实施方式中，所述第一指示为EMLSR操作统一指示。
在一种实施方式中，所述第一指示中每一位的位置，用于指示接入点AP；所述接入点AP为与所述第一MLD所关联的第二MLD对应的AP；所述第二MLD对应的AP包括以下至少之一：第二MLD的附属AP，所述第二MLD的附属AP所在多BSSID集中BSSID所指的AP；
所述第一指示中每一位的值，用于指示接入点AP对应的第一MLD在需要接收组播帧的情况下是否执行所述第一监听操作。
在一种实施方式中，所述第一指示中每一位的取值为第四值的情况下，用于指示接入点AP对应的第一MLD在需要接收组播帧的情况下执行所述第一监听操作；
或者，所述第一指示中每一位的取值为第五值的情况下，用于指示接入点AP对应的第一MLD在需要接收组播帧的情况下无需执行所述第一监听操作。
在一种实施方式中，所述第一指示由EMLSR操作指示元素携带。
在一种实施方式中，所述第一指示由MLSR操作指示元素中的第二字段携带。
在一种实施方式中，所述第二字段为部分EMLSR操作指示位图；所述部分EMLSR操作指示位图是通过截取EMLSR操作指示位图中部分连续比特而形成的。
在一种实施方式中，所述MLSR操作指示元素包括第一字段；
所述第一字段中的第二指示的取值为第六值的情况下，所述第一字段包括第三指示；所述第三指示用于指示从所述EMLSR操作指示位图中截取的部分连续比特的位置。
在一种实施方式中，所述第三指示为位图偏移量。
在一种实施方式中，所述第二指示为EMLSR操作统一指示存在；所述EMLSR操作统一指示存在用于指示第一字段中是否包括EMLSR操作统一指示。
在一种实施方式中，所述第一字段为EMLSR操作指示位图控制。
在一种实施方式中，所述EMLSR操作指示元素由管理帧携带。
在一种实施方式中，所述管理帧包括流量指示图TIM信标帧。
在一种实施方式中，所述第一信息为目标初始控制帧，用于告知在所述目标初始控制帧之后发送组播帧。
在一种实施方式中，所述目标初始控制帧包括指示时长，所述指示时长为所述第一MLD切换至所述第一监听操作的最大可用时长。
在一种实施方式中，所述目标初始控制帧为变体的多用户请求发送MU-RTS触发帧。
在一种实施方式中，所述变体的MU-RTS触发帧的触发类型子域的取值与MU-RTS触发帧的触发类型子域的取值不同。
在一种实施方式中，所述第一接收能力包括以下至少之一：第一速率、第一调制与编码策略MCS、第一空间流SS以及第一带宽BW；
和/或，第二接收能力包括以下至少之一：第二速率、第二调制与编码策略MCS、第二空间流SS以及第二带宽BW；所述第二接收能力为第二监听操作下所述第一站点具有的接收能力；
其中，所述第一速率大于或等于第二速率；所述第一MCS优于或等于第二MCS；所述第一SS大于或等于第二SS；所述第一BW大于或等于第二BW。
在一种实施方式中，所述第二监听操作用于所述第一MLD上的目标站点对所述目标站点所对应的链路进行监听，其中，所述目标站点为所述第一MLD上处于唤醒状态的站点，所述目标站点具有所述第二接收能力；所述第二接收能力包括如下至少之一：进行空闲信道评估CCA，接收用于发起帧交换的初始控制帧。
在一种实施方式中，所述发送单元，还用于在以下时间点发送所述组播帧：
预期的组播帧发送时间点；
在发送传输流量指示图DTIM信标帧之后的时间点；
在广播目标唤醒时间TWT服务周期SP内的时间点；
在特定灵活多播服务FMS流的FMS计数器域当前计数值为零的非空时分组码non-STBC DTIM信标帧的TBTT之后的时间点；
带重试的组播GCR服务周期内。
在一种实施方式中，所述组播帧由物理层协议数据单元PPDU携带，所述PPDU包括以下至少之一：
正交频分复用OFDM物理层协议数据单元PPDU；
非高吞吐量non-HT复制DUP PPDU；
极高吞吐量VHT PPDU；
高吞吐量HT PPDU；
高效率HE单用户SU PPDU；
极高吞吐量EHT多用户MU PPDU在内的极高吞吐量EHT站点STA所支持的PPDU。
在一种实施方式中，所述第一站点为所述第一MLD上与第一链路对应的站点，所述第一站点用于监听所述第一链路；所述第一链路为发送所述组播帧的链路。
在一种实施方式中，所述第一MLD和第二MLD为工作在增强多链路单无线EMLSR模式下的MLD，所述第一链路为EMLSR链路中的链路。
在一种实施方式中，所述第二MLD为接入点AP MLD，所述第一MLD为与所述AP MLD对应的非接入点non-AP MLD。
在一种实施方式中，所述第一多链路设备MLD执行第一监听操作为所述第一多链路设备MLD维持执行第一监听操作的情况下，所述第一监听操作还用于第二站点对所述EMLSR链路中的第二链路进行监听，所述第二站点为所述第一MLD上的站点，所述第二链路为所述EMLSR链路中除所述第一链路以外的链路；
或者，
在所述第一多链路设备MLD执行第一监听操作为所述第一多链路设备从第二监听操作切换至第一监听操作的情况下，所述第一监听操作使得所述第二站点无法进行监听。
本申请实施例的第二多链路设备600能够实现前述的方法实施例中的第二多链路设备的对应功能。该第二多链路设备600中的各个模块(子模块、单元或组件等)对应的流程、功能、实现方式以及有益效果，可参见上述方法实施例中的对应描述，在此不再赘述。需要说明，关于申请实施例的第二多链路设备600中的各个模块(子模块、单元或组件等)所描述的功能，可以由不同的模块(子模块、单元或组件等)实现，也可以由同一个模块(子模块、单元或组件等)实现。
以下结合具体示例，对本申请方案做进一步详细说明，具体地，
本申请方案主要针对non-AP MLD在EMLSR模式下处于EMLSR链路上的站点(也可称为EMLSR链路对应的站点)，在无事先接收MU-RTS触发帧的前提下，直接接收较高阶数或较多SS等的组播帧可能存在的帧处理问题，定义了支持EMLSR模式的AP MLD(也即工作在EMLSR模式下的AP MLD)发送组播帧的机制，以及定义了non-AP MLD在EMLSR模式下接收组播帧的机制；同时，还扩展定义了non-AP MLD对EMLSR链路的监听操作，以满足特殊场景下的组播帧的接收。
这里，在对本申请方案做具体介绍之前，先明确出EMLSR模式下的第一监听操作(listening operation)与EMLSR模式下的第二监听操作(listening operation)的具体定义，具体包括：
第一监听操作，也即EMLSR模式下的第一监听操作，具体指：工作在EMLSR模式下的non-AP MLD上，与EMLSR链路中特定链路(比如第一链路)所对应的附属站点(简称监听站点，比如第一站点)，能接收采用较高速率/较高MCS/较多SS/较高BW发送的PPDU；
这里，所述PPDU可以为以下至少之一：OFDM PPDU，non-HT DUP PPDU，VHT PPDU，HT PPDU，HE SU PPDU，EHT MU PPDU在内的EHT STA所支持的PPDU，如此，确保所述non-AP MLD能够正确接收采用以下参数至少之一的、且携带组播帧的PPDU。其中，所述参数包括：较高速率，较高MCS，较多SS和较高BW。
其中，non-AP MLD进入EMLSR模式下的第一监听操作存在两种方式：
(1)第一监听操作下，能够使得附属站点(比如第一站点)进入EMLSR链路中特定链路(比如第一链路)的帧交换处理对应的监听状态；也就是说，第一监听操作下，特定链路(比如第一链路)所对应的附属站点(比如第一站点)帧的接收能力(也可称为帧的处理能力)，与该特定链路进行帧交换处理的能力一致；也即第一监听操作下，特定链路(比如第一链路)所对应的附属站点能够接收采用较高速率/较高MCS/较多SS/较高BW发送的组播帧。而且，在这种状态下，EMLSR链路中除对特定链路(比如第一链路)外的其他链路无法进行监听，也即除特定链路外的其他链路无法发送或接收帧。
(2)第一监听操作下，EMLSR模式下的特定链路(比如第一链路)所在的附属站点(比如第一站点)本身具备接收采用较高速率/较高MCS/较高BW/较多SS发送的PPDU(携带组播帧)的能力，因此，可保持EMLSR链路中所有处于唤醒状态的附属站点(比如第二站点)均处于监听状态。
相应地，EMLSR模式下的第二监听操作，也即所述non-AP MLD进入EMLSR模式下的第二监听操作，具体指：工作在EMLSR模式的non-AP MLD上，与EMLSR链路对应的所有处于唤醒状态的附属站点(也可简称监听站点，比如目标站点)均处于监听状态；其中，所述EMLSR链路对应的每个站点的接收能力(也即第二接收能力)是受限的，除了CCA、或MU-RTS触发帧等初始控制帧的接收外，对于其他类型的帧，因受限于速率/MCS/SS/BW等能力而导致无法正确接收。
在明确出第一监听操作和第二监听操作的基础上，给出具体四类实现方式第一监听操作的方式，分别为：
方式一：工作在EMLSR模式的non-AP MLD在预期的组播帧发送时间点，或者预期的组播帧发送时间点之前执行第一监听操作，以对EMLSR链路中调度发送组播帧所在链路(也即第一链路)进行监听。比如，工作在EMLSR模式下的non-AP MLD，在预期的组播帧发送时间点之前，提前进入EMLSR链路中调度发送组播帧所在链路的第一监听操作，也即提前执行第一监听操作，以对EMLSR链路中调度发送组播帧所在链路(也即第一链路)进行监听。进一步地，工作在EMLSR模式的non-AP MLD，在执行第一监听操作的情况下，可以通过所述第一链路进行组播帧的接收，并在确认接收完组播帧之后，切换为第二监听操作。也就是说，当non-AP MLD关联于一个支持EMLSR模式的AP MLD，并且non-AP MLD在EMLSR链路上采用EMLSR模式进行操作的情况下，如果组播帧将被调度传输在non-AP MLD对应的EMLSR链路中一条链路(比如第一链路)上，且non-AP MLD上处于该链路(比如第一链路)的站点(设为站点A，也即第一站点)准备接收该组播帧，则non-AP MLD需要确保在预期的组播帧发送时间点或之前提前进入第一监听操作，使得站点A对传输组播帧的该链路(也即第一链路)进行监听，以便能正确地接收组播帧。
这里，对于组播帧的发送端而言，AP MLD的附属AP调度发送缓存的组播帧的方法可以采用如下至少之一：
(1)AP MLD的附属AP在预期的组播帧发送时间点调度发送缓存的组播帧；这里，所述预期的组播帧发送时间点可以为预先约定的任意时间点，本申请方案对此不作限制。
(2)AP MLD的附属AP在发送DTIM信标帧(beacon)之后调度发送缓存的组播帧；比如，在每个DTIM信标帧(beacon)之后调度发送缓存的组播帧。
(3)AP MLD的附属AP在广播TWT服务周期SP内调度发送组播帧；比如，AP MLD的一个附属AP为TWT调度AP，TWT调度AP在位于发送DTIM信标帧所在的信标间隔(beacon interval)期间的广播TWT服务周期SP内调度发送缓存的组播帧。
(4)采用特定灵活多播服务FMS发送缓存的组播帧；比如，在特定灵活多播服务FMS流的FMS计数器域当前计数值为零的非空时分组码non-STBC DTIM信标帧的TBTT之后的时间点，调度发送缓存的组播帧。
(5)采用GCR发送缓存的组播帧。比如，在GCR服务周期内，调度发送缓存的组播帧。
相应地，基于AP MLD的附属AP调度发送缓存的组播帧的方法，预期的组播帧发送时间点可以是 预先约定的任意时间点，还可以基于如下方式得到：
第一，预期的传输流量指示图DTIM信标帧的目标信标发送时间TBTT；此时，所述预期的组播帧发送时间点晚于所述DTIM信标帧的TBTT。此时，所述non-AP MLD在预期的DTIM信标帧的TBTT，或者在预期的DTIM信标帧的TBTT之前的时间点，执行所述第一监听操作。
第二，预期发送组播帧的广播目标唤醒时间TWT服务周期SP的起始时间；此时，所述预期的组播帧发送时间点位于所述广播TWT服务周期SP内。此时，所述non-AP MLD在预期发送组播帧的广播目标唤醒时间TWT服务周期SP的起始时间，或者所述起始时间之前的时间点，执行所述第一监听操作。
第三，特定灵活多播服务FMS流的FMS计数器域当前计数值为零的非空时分组码non-STBC DTIM信标帧的TBTT；此时，所述预期的组播帧发送时间点晚于FMS流的FMS计数器域当前计数值为零的non-STBC DTIM信标帧的TBTT。此时，所述non-AP MLD在特定FMS流的FMS计数器域当前计数值为零的non-STBC DTIM信标帧的TBTT，或者，在特定FMS流的FMS计数器域当前计数值为零的non-STBC DTIM信标帧的TBTT之前的时间点，执行所述第一监听操作。
第四，预期发送组播帧的带重试的组播GCR服务周期的起始时间；此时，所述预期的组播帧发送时间点位于所述GCR服务周期内。此时，所述non-AP MLD在预期发送组播帧的带重试的组播GCR服务周期的起始时间，或者该起始时间之前的时间点，执行所述第一监听操作。
举例来说，当AP MLD通过EMLSR链路中的某条链路(比如第一链路)在DTIM信标帧之后调度发送缓存的组播帧时，工作在EMLSR模式下的non-AP MLD，会首先在预期的DTIM信标帧TBTT或之前进入组播帧调度发送所在链路(比如第一链路)的第一监听操作，也即在预期的DTIM信标帧TBTT或之前执行第一监听操作，以对组播帧调度发送所在链路(也即第一链路)进行监听。随后，工作在EMLSR模式下的non-AP MLD，在接收完DTIM信标帧后，维持针对组播帧调度发送所在链路(比如第一链路)的第一监听操作(也即维持帧交换操作状态)，也即维持第一监听操作，以维持对组播帧调度发送所在链路(比如第一链路)的监听，直到完成组播帧的接收。进一步地，当non-AP MLD收到指示，比如，收到第一链路的AP发送的组播帧的更多数据子域(More Data subfield)为0，则确认没有更多的组播帧时，从第一监听操作(也可称帧交换操作)返回至EMLSR模式下的第二监听操作。
再比如，当AP MLD在广播TWT服务周期或GCR服务周期内调度发送缓存的组播帧的情况下，工作在EMLSR模式下的non-AP MLD，会首先在预期的调度发送组播帧的广播TWT服务周期或GCR服务周期的起始时间或之前，提前进入组播帧调度发送所在链路(比如第一链路)的第一监听操作，也即提前进入第一监听操作，以对组播帧调度发送所在链路(比如第一链路)进行监听。随后，工作在EMLSR模式下的non-AP MLD，在接收完DTIM信标帧后，维持针对组播帧调度发送所在链路(比如第一链路)的第一监听操作(也即维持帧交换操作状态)，也即维持第一监听操作，以维持对组播帧调度发送所在链路(比如第一链路)的监听，直到完成组播帧的接收。进一步地，当non-AP MLD收到指示确认没有组播帧(也即接收完组播帧)时，所述non-AP MLD从第一监听操作(也即帧交换操作)返回至EMLSR模式下的所述第二监听操作；或者，在到达广播TWT服务周期或GCR服务周期(SP)的结束时间点，且无正在接收的组播帧时，则从第一监听操作返回到EMLSR模式下的第二监听操作。
方式二：工作在EMLSR模式的non-AP MLD，当准备在EMLSR链路中的一条链路上接收组播帧时，可以先在DTIM信标帧的TBTT之前进入第二监听操作，并在接收完DTIM信标帧之后、且在预期的组播帧调度发送的时间点之前，从所述第二监听操作切换进入第一监听操作，使得所述第一MLD的第一站点对EMLSR链路中组播帧调度发送所在链路(比如第一链路)进行监听，并通过该链路接收组播帧，直到完成组播帧的接收，如non-AP MLD收到指示确认没有更多的组播帧的情况下，即可认为接收完成，随后，从第一监听操作(也即帧交换操作)返回到第二监听操作。
可以理解的是，AP MLD在EMLSR链路上发送DTIM信标帧之后，且在调度发送组播帧的起始时间点之前，需要预留足够的时长，如此，可以确保工作在EMLSR模式下的、该AP MLD所关联的non-AP MLD，在接收完DTIM信标帧之后并在组播帧发送的时间点之前，切换进入EMLSR链路中组播帧调度发送所在链路(比如第一链路)的第一监听操作。
进一步地，当non-AP MLD收到指示，比如，收到第一链路的AP发送的组播帧的更多数据子域(More Data subfield)为0，则确认没有更多的组播帧时，从第一监听操作(也可称帧交换操作)返回至EMLSR模式下的第二监听操作。
方式三：AP MLD发送携带EMLSR操作指示元素的管理帧(如TIM信标帧)，其中，EMLSR操作指示元素能够指示当AP有组播帧缓存时(也即AP对应的站点需要接收组播帧的情况下)，该AP对应的工作在EMLSR模式下的non-AP MLD(与AP对应的AP MLD所关联)，是否需要执行具备较高速率/较高MCS/较多SS/较高BW的接收能力(也即第一接收能力)、且处于该AP所在链路(比如第 一链路)的第一监听操作。进一步地，工作在EMLSR模式下的non-AP MLD，在获取到EMLSR操作指示元素后，当意图接收该组播帧(也即需要接收)时，根据EMLSR操作指示元素的值含义确定是否提前执行第一监听操作，比如，确定是否在预期的组播帧发送时间点或之前执行第一监听操作。
进一步地，当non-AP MLD收到指示，比如，收到第一链路的AP发送的组播帧的更多数据子域(More Data subfield)为0，则确认没有更多的组播帧时，从第一监听操作(也可称帧交换操作)返回至EMLSR模式下的第二监听操作。
方式四：工作在EMLSR模式下的AP MLD，当预期采用较高速率/较高MCS/较多SS/较高BW发送组播帧时，在发送该组播帧之前，可以预先发送无需回复的目标初始控制帧，比如变体的MU-RTS触发帧，以告知(如告知该工作在EMLSR模式下的AP MLD所关联的non-AP MLD，该non-AP MLD也工作在EMLSR模式下)在目标初始控制帧之后发送组播帧，且发送的组播帧采用了较高速率/较高MCS/较多SS/较高BW；同时，该目标初始控制帧可以通过携带指定的padding(位填充)时长(也即指示时长)，来确保工作在EMLSR模式下的该non-AP MLD，在EMLSR链路中的特定链路(也即发送组播帧的链路，比如第一链路)上有足够的时间提前切换到第一监听操作，以便于正常接收组播帧。
进一步地，当non-AP MLD收到指示，比如，收到第一链路的AP发送的组播帧的更多数据子域(More Data subfield)为0，则确认没有更多的组播帧时，从第一监听操作(也可称帧交换操作)返回至EMLSR模式下的第二监听操作。
以下结合具体示例对本申请方案做进一步详细说明，具体地，
图7(A)是根据本申请实施例通信方法在一具体示例中的实现流程示意图一；如图7(A)所示，non-AP MLD在DTIM信标帧的TBTT之前进入第一监听操作，具体地：
non-AP MLD经过多链路建立流程后关联于AP MLD，关联的两条链路分别为链路1(Link1)与链路2(Link2)。其中，Link1的两端分别为AP MLD的附属AP1和non-AP MLD的站点1(STA1)，也即AP1和STA1对应的链路为Link1。
Link2的两端分别为AP MLD的附属AP2和non-AP MLD的站点2(STA2)，也即AP2和STA3对应的链路为Link2。
这里，AP MLD支持EMLSR模式，且non-AP MLD在EMLSR链路(如Link1与Link2)上采用EMLSR模式进行操作。
当AP MLD通过EMLSR链路中的Link1，预期在发送DTIM信标帧之后调度发送缓存(即调度并发送已缓存的)的组播帧(Groupcast)时，工作在EMLSR模式下的non-AP MLD，首先在预期的DTIM信标帧的TBTT之前进入组播帧调度发送所在链路(也即Link1)的第一监听操作，使得所述STA1具有较强的第一接收能力，并使得所述STA1对Link1进行监听；工作在EMLSR模式下的non-AP MLD在接收完DTIM信标帧后，维持组播帧调度发送所在链路(即Link1)的第一监听操作(也即称为维持帧交换操作)，直到完成组播帧的接收；这里，所述AP MLD通过AP1在Link1上发送组播帧。
进一步地，当non-AP MLD收到指示确认没有更多的组播帧后，则经过EMLSR转换时延，从第一监听操作切换至EMLSR模式下的Link1和Link2的第二监听操作。
这里，第一监听操作，也即EMLSR模式下的第一监听操作下，工作在EMLSR模式下的non-AP MLD，在EMLSR链路中特定链路(该示例中即为Link1)所对应的STA1，能接收采用较高速率/较高MCS/较多SS/较高BW发送的携带组播帧的PPDU。
这里，non-AP MLD进入EMLSR模式下特定链路(该示例中即为Link1)的第一监听操作，存在两种方式：
(1)进入EMLSR链路中特定链路(该示例中即为Link1)的帧交换处理对应的监听操作状态，此时，特定链路(该示例中即为Link1)所对应的附属站点(该示例中即为STA1)能够接收较高速率/较高MCS/较多SS/较高BW发送的PPDU，此时的接收能力(也即第一接收能力)，与该特定链路进行帧交换处理的能力一致。在这种状态下，EMLSR链路中除特定链路外的其他链路(对于该示例而言，可为Link2)无法进行监听操作，即无法发送或接收帧。
(2)EMLSR模式下特定链路(该示例中即为Link1)所在的附属站点(该示例中即为STA1)，本身具备接收较高速率/较高MCS/较多SS/较高BW发送的PPDU的能力，因此，可保持EMLSR链路中所有处于唤醒状态(awake state)的附属站点(比如STA2)均处于监听状态。此时，处于唤醒状态的附属站点(比如STA2)可以与STA1的接收能力相同，也可以不同，本申请方案对此不作限制，只要STA1具有接收采用较高速率/较高MCS/较高BW/较多SS发送的组播帧的能力，均属于本申请方案的保护范围。
EMLSR模式下的第二监听操作是指：工作在EMLSR模式下的non-AP MLD，在EMLSR链路中 所有处于唤醒状态(awake state)的附属站点(简称监听站点，比如Link1和Link2)都处于监听状态；其中，EMLSR链路中每个站点，比如Link1和Link2的监听操作的能力均是受限的，除了CCA与MU-RTS等初始控制帧的接收外，对于其他类型的帧因受限于速率/MCS/SS/BW能力可能无法正确接收。
这里，所述第一监听操作和所述第二监听操作可参照前述描述，此处不再赘述。
所述EMLSR第一转换时延是指工作在EMLSR模式下的non-AP MLD从EMLSR链路中的第一监听操作切换到EMLSR链路(包括多条链路)上的第二监听操作的转换时长。
图7(B)是根据本申请实施例通信方法在一具体示例中的实现流程示意图二；如图7(B)所示，non-AP MLD在接收到DTIM信标帧之后、且调度发送的组播帧之前执行第一监听操作，具体地：
non-AP MLD经过多链路建立流程后关联于AP MLD，关联的两条链路分别为链路1(Link1)与链路2(Link2)。其中，Link1的两端分别为AP MLD的附属AP1和non-AP MLD的站点1(STA1)，也即AP1和STA1对应的链路为Link1。Link2的两端分别为AP MLD的附属AP2和non-AP MLD的站点2(STA2)，也即AP2和STA3对应的链路为Link2。
这里，AP MLD支持EMLSR模式，且non-AP MLD在EMLSR链路(如Link1与Link2)上采用EMLSR模式进行操作。
当AP MLD预期在Link1上、且在发送DTIM信标帧之后调度发送组播帧时，在发送DTIM信标帧的结束时间点与开始发送组播帧的时间点之间，预留足够的时长，即DTIM信标帧的发送结束时间点与组播帧的发送起始时间点之间的时长大于或等于EMLSR第二转换时延，以确保工作在EMLSR模式下的non-AP MLD在接收完DTIM信标帧之后，并在组播帧开始发送的时间点之前切换进入EMLSR链路中组播帧调度发送所在链路(该示例为Link1)的第一监听操作。
这里，所述第二转换时延指工作在EMLSR模式下的non-AP MLD从EMLSR链路中的第二监听操作切换到第一监听操作的转换时长。
具体地，工作在EMLSR模式的non-AP MLD，当预期接收Link1上在DTIM信标帧之后调度发送缓存的组播帧时，首先在预期的DTIM信标帧的TBTT或之前进入EMLSR链路上的多链路(即Link1与Link2)的第二监听操作，然后在接收完DTIM信标帧后，在组播帧开始发送时间点或之前，进入在Link1的第一监听操作，并维持Link1的第一监听操作，以在Link1上接收组播帧，直到完成组播帧的接收。当non-AP MLD收到指示确认没有更多的组播帧后，则经过EMLSR第一转换时延，从第一监听操作切换至EMLSR模式下的多链路(Link1与Link2)的第二监听操作。
这里，所述第一监听操作、所述第二监听操作以及EMLSR第一转换时延可参照前述描述，此处不再赘述。
图7(C)是根据本申请实施例通信方法在一具体示例中的实现流程示意图三；如图7(C)所示，non-AP MLD在广播TWT服务周期起始时间点前/时进入第一监听操作，具体地：
non-AP MLD经过多链路建立流程后关联于AP MLD，关联的两条链路分别为链路1(Link1)与链路2(Link2)。其中，Link1的两端分别为AP MLD的附属AP1和non-AP MLD的站点1(STA1)，也即AP1和STA1对应的链路为Link1。Link2的两端分别为AP MLD的附属AP2和non-AP MLD的站点2(STA2)，也即AP2和STA3对应的链路为Link2。
这里，AP MLD支持EMLSR模式，且non-AP MLD在EMLSR链路(如Link1与Link2)上采用EMLSR模式进行操作。non-AP MLD上处于EMLSR链路的一个站点如STA1，与AP MLD的相关联AP如AP1之间建立了广播TWT，并且STA1是该广播TWT服务周期的预定站点，AP1在广播TWT服务周期内调度发送缓存的组播帧。
当AP MLD通过EMLSR链路中的链路Link1，预期在位于发送DTIM信标帧的信标间隔内的、广播TWT服务周期期间调度发送缓存的组播帧时，工作在EMLSR模式的non-AP MLD，首先在广播TWT服务周期的起始时间前/时，进入组播帧调度发送所在链路(即Link1)的第一监听操作；随后，在广播TWT服务周期期间维持第一监听操作，并进行组播帧的接收，直到完成组播帧的接收。进一步地，当non-AP MLD收到指示确认没有更多的组播帧或者到达广播TWT服务周期的结束时间点，则non-AP MLD经过EMLSR第一转换时延切换至EMLSR模式下的多链路(即Link1与Link2)的第二监听操作。
这里，所述第一监听操作、第二监听操作以及所述EMLSR第一转换时延可参照前述描述，此处不再赘述。
图7(D)是根据本申请实施例通信方法在一具体示例中的实现流程示意图四；如图7(D)所示，non-AP MLD基于EMLSR操作指示元素，并在DTIM信标帧后进入第一监听操作。
首先，对EMLSR操作指示元素进行说明；具体如下：
Figure PCTCN2022090805-appb-000005
表5
Figure PCTCN2022090805-appb-000006
表6(A)
Figure PCTCN2022090805-appb-000007
表6(B)
如表5所示，所述EMLSR操作指示元素包括元素标识(Element ID)、长度(Length)、元素标识扩展(Element ID Extension)；这里，所述元素标识、长度、元素标识扩展均占用1个字节，具体定义可类似于相关标准中的定义。进一步地，所述EMLSR操作指示元素还包括EMLSR操作指示位图控制(EMLSR Operation Indicator Bitmap Control)，也占用1个字节。
该示例中，基于表5、表6(A)及表6(B)所示的结构，可采用两种方式来指示在需要接收组播帧的情况下是否执行所述第一监听操作，具体地：
第一种方式：
如表6(B)所示，所述EMLSR操作指示位图控制包括：EMLSR操作统一指示存在(EMLSR Operation for ALL Indicator Present)，在所述EMLSR操作统一指示存在的取值为1的情况下，所述EMLSR操作指示位图控制还包括：EMLSR操作统一指示(EMLSR Operation for ALL Indicator)和预留(Reserved)。这里，所述EMLSR操作统一指示存在、EMLSR操作统一指示和预留分别占用1个位、1个位和6个位。基于此，EMLSR操作指示位图控制所包括的EMLSR操作统一指示存在、EMLSR操作统一指示和预留共占用一个字节。
如表6(A)所示，在所述EMLSR操作统一指示存在的取值为0的情况下，所述EMLSR操作指示位图控制还包括：位图偏移量(Bitmap Offset)。这里，所述EMLSR操作统一指示存在和位图偏移量分别占用1个位和7个位。基于此，EMLSR操作指示位图控制所包括的EMLSR操作统一指示存在和位图偏移量共占用一个字节。
进一步地，EMLSR操作统一指示(或称EMLSR操作统一指示域)用于统一指示AP对应的工作在EMLSR模式下的non-AP MLD，在需要接收组播帧的情况下，是否执行第一监听操作，所述第一监听操作用于该non-AP MLD上、与AP对应的第一站点具有第一接收能力，进而使该第一站点对该该AP所在链路进行监听。也即，EMLSR操作统一指示用于统一指示AP对应的工作在EMLSR模式下的non-AP MLD，在需要接收组播帧的情况下，是否执行具有较高速率/较高MCS/较多SS/较高BW的接收能力(也即第一接收能力)、且该AP所在链路(比如第一链路)的第一监听操作。
其中，所述AP为以下至少之一：AP MLD的附属AP，AP MLD的附属AP所在多BSSID集(multiple BSSID set)中的BSSID所指的AP。所述non-AP MLD与AP MLD所关联。
可以理解的是，AP对应的工作在EMLSR模式下的non-AP MLD，可以具体为：AP对应的站点(比如第一站点)所对应的工作在EMLSR模式下的non-AP MLD。比如，AP1对应的工作在EMLSR模式下的non-AP MLD，可以具体为AP1对应的SAT1所对应的non-AP MLD。
进一步地，当EMLSR操作统一指示取值为1的情况下，表示AP对应的工作在EMLSR模式下的non-AP MLD，在需要接收组播帧的情况下，执行具有较高速率/较高MCS/较多空间流(SS)/较高BW的接收能力(也即第一接收能力)、该AP所在链路(比如第一链路)的第一监听操作。
当EMLSR操作统一指示取值为0，表示AP对应的工作在EMLSR模式下的non-AP MLD，在需要接收组播帧的情况下，无需执行具有较高速率/较高MCS/较多空间流(SS)/较高BW的接收能力(也即第一接收能力)、该AP所在链路(比如第一链路)的第一监听操作。
也就是说，该方式中，通过EMLSR操作统一指示来指示在需要接收组播帧的情况下是否执行所述第一监听操作，此时，所述EMLSR操作指示元素所包含的部分EMLSR操作指示位图的字节数为0；即该方式中，所述EMLSR操作指示元素的结构如表5和表6(B)所示，此时，表5中部分EMLSR操作指示位图的字节数为0。
第二种方式：
如表5所示，所述EMLSR操作指示元素还包括部分EMLSR操作指示位图(Partial EMLSR Operation Indicator Bitmap)；区别于第一种方式，该方式中，通过部分EMLSR操作指示位图来指示在需要接收组播帧的情况下是否执行所述第一监听操作。即该方式中，所述EMLSR操作指示元素的结构如表5和表6(A)所示，此时，表5中部分EMLSR操作指示位图的字节数为1-251中任意值。
这里，位图偏移量可类似于相关标准中TIM元素的位图偏移量(Bitmap Offset)域的定义，区别在于，相关标准中TIM元素的位图偏移量(Bitmap Offset)域对应于流量标记虚拟位图(traffic indication virtual bitmap)，而本申请方案中的位图偏移量对应的是EMLSR操作指示位图。
进一步地，部分EMLSR操作指示位图(也可称为部分EMLSR操作指示位图域，或字段)是通过截取EMLSR操作指示位图中有意义的部分连续比特而形成的，其截取方式与相关标准中TIM元素的形成部分流量标记虚拟位图的方式一致，该部分流量标记虚拟位图是截取流量标记虚拟位图的部分连续位置的比特而形成的；而区别在于两者比特值的定义不同。
具体地，本申请方案中，EMLSR操作指示位图中每一位的位置对应于AP，这里，AP为以下至少之一：AP MLD的附属AP，AP MLD的附属AP所在多BSSID集中的BSSID所指的AP。本申请方案中，EMLSR操作指示位图中位的位置(bit positions)定义，与相关标准中TIM元素的流量标记虚拟位图中有组播帧缓存时的AP与位的位置之间对应关系定义一致。
进一步地，EMLSR操作指示位图中的每一位的值指示：该位对应的AP，在有组播帧缓存时，是否需要该AP对应的工作在EMLSR模式下的non-AP MLD，执行具备较高速率/较高MCS/较多SS/较高BW的接收能力(也即第一接收能力)、且处于该AP所在链路(比如第一链路)的第一监听操作。换言之，EMLSR操作指示位图中的每一位的值指示：该位对应的AP对应的工作在EMLSR模式下的non-AP MLD，在需要接收组播帧的情况下，是否需要执行具备较高速率/较高MCS/较多SS/较高BW的接收能力(也即第一接收能力)、且处于该AP所在链路(比如第一链路)的第一监听操作。
可以理解的是，AP对应的工作在EMLSR模式下的non-AP MLD，可以具体为：AP对应的站点(比如第一站点)所对应的工作在EMLSR模式下的non-AP MLD。所述non-AP MLD与所述AP MLD所关联。
进一步地，当EMLSR操作指示位图中某一位的值为1时，表示该位所对应的AP，当有组播帧缓存时，需要该AP对应的工作在EMLSR模式下的non-AP MLD执行具备较高速率/较高MCS/较多SS/较高BW的接收能力、且处于该AP所在链路的第一监听操作；
当EMLSR操作指示位图中某一位的值为0时，表示该位所对应的AP，当有组播帧缓存时，无需该AP对应的工作在EMLSR模式下的non-AP MLD在执行具备较高速率/较高MCS/较多SS/较高BW的接收能力、且处于该AP所在链路的第一监听操作。
而且，EMLSR操作指示元素可以由管理帧携带，如TIM信标帧携带；比如，可以在TIM信标帧的帧体中加入EMLSR操作指示元素。当TIM信标帧携带EMLSR操作指示元素的时候，表示所指示的AP发送的组播帧需要工作在EMLSR模式下的non-AP MLD，在准备接收该组播帧的情况下，按照EMLSR操作指示元素中所指示的操作执行，如此，便于正常接收组播帧。
如图7(D)所示，non-AP MLD基于EMLSR操作指示元素，并在DTIM信标帧后进入第一监听操作，具体包括：
non-AP MLD经过多链路建立流程后关联于AP MLD，关联的两条链路分别为链路1(Link1)与链路2(Link2)。其中，Link1的两端分别为AP MLD的附属AP1和non-AP MLD的站点1(STA1)，也即AP1和STA1对应的链路为Link1。Link2的两端分别为AP MLD的附属AP2和non-AP MLD的站点2(STA2)，也即AP2和STA3对应的链路为Link2。
这里，AP MLD支持EMLSR模式，且non-AP MLD在EMLSR链路(如Link1与Link2)上采用EMLSR模式进行操作。
当AP MLD的AP1在发送的TIM信标帧中携带EMLSR操作指示元素，且该EMLSR操作指示元素指示AP1当有组播帧缓存时，需要工作在EMLSR模型下的non-AP MLD，进入具备较高速率/较高 MCS/较多SS/较高BW的接收能力(也即第一接收能力)的、且处于AP1所在链路(即Link1)的第一监听操作。
进一步地，当AP MLD通过EMLSR链路中的Link1在DTIM信标帧之后调度发送缓存的组播帧时，工作在EMLSR模式的non-AP MLD，首先在预期的DTIM信标帧TBTT或之前，进入组播帧调度发送所在链路(即Link1)的第一监听操作，随后，在接收完DTIM信标帧后维持组播帧调度发送所在链路(即Link1)的第一监听操作，直到完成组播帧的接收；进一步地，当non-AP MLD收到指示确认没有更多的组播帧后，则经过EMLSR第一转换时延，从第一监听操作切换至EMLSR模式下的多链路(Link1与Link2)的第二监听操作。
进一步地，AP MLD附属AP1在发送的TIM信标帧中携带EMLSR操作指示元素，并指示AP1当有组播帧缓存时，工作在EMLSR模式下的non-AP MLD，无需进入处于AP1所在链路(Link1)的第一监听操作。进一步地，当AP MLD通过EMLSR链路中的链路Link1在之后的DTIM信标帧之后调度发送缓存的组播帧时，工作在EMLSR模式的non-AP MLD，首先在预期的DTIM信标帧的TBTT或之前入多链路(Link1与Link1)的第二监听操作，并在第二监听操作下，进行DTIM信标帧与组播帧的接收，直到组播帧接收完毕。
这里，所述第一监听操作、第二监听操作以及所述EMLSR第一转换时延可参照前述描述，此处不再赘述。
图7(E)是根据本申请实施例通信方法在一具体示例中的实现流程示意图五；如图7(E)所示，non-AP MLD在广播TWT服务周期起始时间点前/时进入第一监听操作，具体地：
non-AP MLD经过多链路建立流程后关联于AP MLD，关联的两条链路分别为链路1(Link1)与链路2(Link2)。其中，Link1的两端分别为AP MLD的附属AP1和non-AP MLD的站点1(STA1)，也即AP1和STA1对应的链路为Link1。
Link2的两端分别为AP MLD的附属AP2和non-AP MLD的站点2(STA2)，也即AP2和STA3对应的链路为Link2。
这里，AP MLD支持EMLSR模式，且non-AP MLD在EMLSR链路(如Link1与Link2)上采用EMLSR模式进行操作。non-AP MLD上处于EMLSR链路的一个站点如STA1，与AP MLD上该STA1对应的(也即相关联)AP如AP1之间建立了广播TWT，并且STA1是该广播TWT服务周期的预定站点，AP1在广播TWT服务周期内调度发送缓存的组播帧。
AP MLD的附属AP1，在发送的DTIM信标帧中携带EMLSR操作指示元素，该EMLSR操作指示元素指示AP1当有组播帧缓存时，需要工作在EMLSR模式下的non-AP MLD，进入具备较高速率/较高MCS/较多空间流(SS)/较高BW的接收能力的、且处于AP1所在链路(Link1)的第一监听操作。
当AP MLD通过EMLSR链路中的链路Link1，预期在位于发送DTIM信标帧的信标间隔内的、广播TWT服务周期(如图7(E)所示的第一个广播TWT服务周期)期间调度发送缓存的组播帧时，工作在EMLSR模式的non-AP MLD，首先在广播TWT服务周期的起始时间前/时，进入组播帧调度发送所在链路(即Link1)的第一监听操作；随后，在广播TWT服务周期期间维持第一监听操作，并进行组播帧的接收，直到完成组播帧的接收。进一步地，当non-AP MLD收到指示确认没有更多的组播帧或者到达广播TWT服务周期的结束时间点，则non-AP MLD经过EMLSR第一转换时延切换至EMLSR模式下的多链路(Link1与Link2)的第二监听操作。
进一步地，AP MLD附属AP1，在发送的DTIM信标帧中携带EMLSR操作指示元素，该EMLSR操作指示元素指示AP1当有组播帧缓存时，工作在EMLSR模式的non-AP MLD，无需进入处于AP1所在链路(Link1)的第一监听操作。进一步地，当AP MLD通过EMLSR链路中的链路Link1，预期在广播TWT服务周期(如图7(E)所示的第二个广播TWT服务周期)期间调度发送缓存的组播帧时，工作在EMLSR模式的non-AP MLD，在广播TWT服务周期的起始时间前/时进入多链路(Link1与Link1)的第二监听操作，并在第二监听操作下，在广播TWT服务周期内进行组播帧的接收，直到完成组播帧的接收。
这里，所述第一监听操作、第二监听操作以及所述EMLSR第一转换时延可参照前述描述，此处不再赘述。
图7(F)是根据本申请实施例通信方法在一具体示例中的实现流程示意图六；如图7(F)所示，non-AP MLD基于变体的MU-RTS触发帧执行第一监听操作，具体地：
在802.11be触发帧(Trigger Frame)格式定义基础上，新增MU-RTS Variant(变体)触发帧的变体类型，即“无需允许发送(Clear To Send，CTS)回复的MU-RTS”，如表7所示。该MU-RTS Variant触发帧，也即变体的MU-RTS触发帧，除了在触发帧变体(Trigger frame variant)的触发类型子域值与MU-RTS不同外，其他定义与MU-RTS一致。
Figure PCTCN2022090805-appb-000008
表7
该MU-RTS Variant触发帧用于在发送特定的组播帧(比如采用较高速率/较高MCS/较多SS/较高BW发送的组播帧)之前发送，用于告知MU-RTS Variant触发帧之后将发送组播帧，而且，还可根据EMLSR转换时延(比如，从第二监听操作切换至第一监听操作的EMLSR第二转换时延)的需求，加入适当的padding时长，以确保工作在EMLSR操作的non-AP MLD，在EMLSR链路中的对应链路上，有足够的时间提前切换到第一监听操作，以便于接收MU-RTS Variant触发帧之后所发送的特定的组播帧。
具体地，non-AP MLD经过多链路建立流程后关联于AP MLD，关联的两条链路分别为链路1(Link1)与链路2(Link2)。其中，Link1的两端分别为AP MLD的附属AP1和non-AP MLD的站点1(STA1)，也即AP1和STA1对应的链路为Link1。Link2的两端分别为AP MLD的附属AP2和non-AP MLD的站点2(STA2)，也即AP2和STA3对应的链路为Link2。
这里，AP MLD支持EMLSR模式，且non-AP MLD在EMLSR链路(如Link1与Link2)上采用EMLSR模式进行操作。
AP MLD附属AP1，当采用较高速率/较高MCS/较多SS/较高BW发送组播帧时，在发送该组播帧之前，先发送无需回复的目标初始控制帧，如MU-RTS Variant触发帧，以告知该目标初始控制帧之后的组播帧采用了较高速率/较高MCS/较多SS/较高BW，同时，该目标初始控制帧通过指定的padding(位填充)时长，来确保工作在EMLSR模式下的该non-AP MLD，在EMLSR链路中的特定链路上有足够的时间提前切换至第一监听操作，以便于正常接收组播帧。
如图7(F)所示，在第一个DTIM信标帧后，先发送MU-RTS variant触发帧，再发送采用较高速率/较高MCS/较多SS/较高BW发送的组播帧。
对于图7(F)中的第一个DTIM信标帧后的组播帧的接收而言，当non-AP MLD准备接收Link1上、在DTIM信标帧之后调度发送缓存的组播帧时，首先在预期的DTIM信标帧TBTT之前进入EMLSR链路上多链路(Link1与Link2)的第二监听操作；然后在接收完DTIM信标帧后，接收MU-RTS变体触发帧，进而在MU-RTS变体触发帧的指示时长内从第二监听操作切换至Link1的第一监听操作，并维持Link1的第一监听操作，进行组播帧的接收，直到完成组播帧的接收；进一步地，当non-AP MLD收到指示确认没有更多的组播帧后，则经过EMLSR第一转换时延切换至EMLSR模式下的多链路(Link1与Link2)的第二监听操作。
对于7(F)中的第二个DTIM信标帧后的组播帧接收而言，non-AP MLD当准备接收Link1上在DTIM信标帧之后调度发送缓存的组播帧时，在预期的DTIM信标帧TBTT之前进入EMLSR链路上多链路(Link1与Link2)的第二监听操作，然后进行DTIM信标帧与组播帧的接收，直到组播帧接收完毕。
这里，所述第一监听操作、第二监听操作以及所述EMLSR第一转换时延可参照前述描述，此处不再赘述。
基于此，本申请方案定义了支持EMLSR模式的AP MLD发送组播帧的机制，以及定义了non-AP MLD在EMLSR模式下接收组播帧的机制，同时，扩展定义non-AP MLD处于EMLSR链路的监听操作，如此，以满足特殊场景下的组播帧的接收。
可以理解的是，对于增强多链路多无线模式的操作方法，本申请方案也同样适用。
图8是根据本申请实施例的通信设备800示意性结构图。该通信设备800包括处理器810，处理器810可以从存储器中调用并运行计算机程序，以使通信设备800实现本申请实施例中的方法。
在一种可能的实现方式中，通信设备800还可以包括存储器820。其中，处理器810可以从存储器820中调用并运行计算机程序，以使通信设备800实现本申请实施例中的方法。
其中，存储器820可以是独立于处理器810的一个单独的器件，也可以集成在处理器810中。
在一种可能的实现方式中，通信设备800还可以包括收发器830，处理器810可以控制该收发器830与其他设备进行通信，具体地，可以向其他设备发送信息或数据，或接收其他设备发送的信息或数据。
其中，收发器830可以包括发射机和接收机。收发器830还可以进一步包括天线，天线的数量可以 为一个或多个。
在一种可能的实现方式中，该通信设备800可为本申请实施例的第二多链路设备，并且该通信设备800可以实现本申请实施例的各个方法中由第二多链路设备实现的相应流程，为了简洁，在此不再赘述。
在一种可能的实现方式中，该通信设备800可为本申请实施例的第一多链路设备，并且该通信设备800可以实现本申请实施例的各个方法中由第一多链路设备实现的相应流程，为了简洁，在此不再赘述。
图9是根据本申请实施例的芯片900的示意性结构图。该芯片900包括处理器910，处理器910可以从存储器中调用并运行计算机程序，以实现本申请实施例中的方法。
在一种可能的实现方式中，芯片900还可以包括存储器920。其中，处理器910可以从存储器920中调用并运行计算机程序，以实现本申请实施例中由第一多链路设备或者第二多链路设备执行的方法。
其中，存储器920可以是独立于处理器910的一个单独的器件，也可以集成在处理器910中。
在一种可能的实现方式中，该芯片900还可以包括输入接口930。其中，处理器910可以控制该输入接口930与其他设备或芯片进行通信，具体地，可以获取其他设备或芯片发送的信息或数据。
在一种可能的实现方式中，该芯片900还可以包括输出接口940。其中，处理器910可以控制该输出接口940与其他设备或芯片进行通信，具体地，可以向其他设备或芯片输出信息或数据。
在一种可能的实现方式中，该芯片可应用于本申请实施例中的第二多链路设备，并且该芯片可以实现本申请实施例的各个方法中由第二多链路设备实现的相应流程，为了简洁，在此不再赘述。
在一种可能的实现方式中，该芯片可应用于本申请实施例中的第一多链路设备，并且该芯片可以实现本申请实施例的各个方法中由第一多链路设备实现的相应流程，为了简洁，在此不再赘述。
应用于第二多链路设备和第一多链路设备的芯片可以是相同的芯片或不同的芯片。
应理解，本申请实施例提到的芯片还可以称为系统级芯片，系统芯片，芯片系统或片上系统芯片等。
上述提及的处理器可以是通用处理器、数字信号处理器(digital signal processor，DSP)、现成可编程门阵列(field programmable gate array，FPGA)、专用集成电路(application specific integrated circuit，ASIC)或者其他可编程逻辑器件、晶体管逻辑器件、分立硬件组件等。其中，上述提到的通用处理器可以是微处理器或者也可以是任何常规的处理器等。
上述提及的存储器可以是易失性存储器或非易失性存储器，或可包括易失性和非易失性存储器两者。其中，非易失性存储器可以是只读存储器(read-only memory，ROM)、可编程只读存储器(programmable ROM，PROM)、可擦除可编程只读存储器(erasable PROM，EPROM)、电可擦除可编程只读存储器(electrically EPROM，EEPROM)或闪存。易失性存储器可以是随机存取存储器(random access memory，RAM)。
应理解，上述存储器为示例性但不是限制性说明，例如，本申请实施例中的存储器还可以是静态随机存取存储器(static RAM，SRAM)、动态随机存取存储器(dynamic RAM，DRAM)、同步动态随机存取存储器(synchronous DRAM，SDRAM)、双倍数据速率同步动态随机存取存储器(double data rate SDRAM，DDR SDRAM)、增强型同步动态随机存取存储器(enhanced SDRAM，ESDRAM)、同步连接动态随机存取存储器(synch link DRAM，SLDRAM)以及直接内存总线随机存取存储器(Direct Rambus RAM，DR RAM)等等。也就是说，本申请实施例中的存储器旨在包括但不限于这些和任意其它适合类型的存储器。
图10是根据本申请实施例的通信系统1000的示意性框图。该通信系统1000包括第一多链路设备1010和第二多链路设备1020。具体包括：
第一多链路设备1010，用于执行第一监听操作，其中，所述第一监听操作用于所述第一多链路设备上的第一站点采用第一接收能力接收组播帧；
第一多链路设备1020，用于发送第一信息，所述第一信息用于第一多链路设备执行第一监听操作，所述第一监听操作用于所述第一多链路设备上的第一站点采用第一接收能力接收组播帧。
其中，该第一多链路设备1010可以用于实现上述方法中由第一多链路设备实现的相应的功能，以及该第二多链路设备1020可以用于实现上述方法中由第二多链路设备实现的相应的功能。为了简洁，在此不再赘述。
在上述实施例中，可以全部或部分地通过软件、硬件、固件或者其任意组合来实现。当使用软件实现时，可以全部或部分地以计算机程序产品的形式实现。该计算机程序产品包括一个或多个计算机指令。在计算机上加载和执行该计算机程序指令时，全部或部分地产生按照本申请实施例中的流程或功能。该计算机可以是通用计算机、专用计算机、计算机网络、或者其他可编程装置。该计算机指令可以存储在计算机可读存储介质中，或者从一个计算机可读存储介质向另一个计算机可读存储介质传输，例如，该计算机指令可以从一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心通过有线(例如同轴电缆、光纤、数字用户线(Digital Subscriber Line，DSL))或无线(例如红外、无线、微波等)方式向另一个网站站点、计 算机、服务器或数据中心进行传输。该计算机可读存储介质可以是计算机能够存取的任何可用介质或者是包含一个或多个可用介质集成的服务器、数据中心等数据存储设备。该可用介质可以是磁性介质，(例如，软盘、硬盘、磁带)、光介质(例如，DVD)、或者半导体介质(例如固态硬盘(Solid State Disk，SSD))等。
应理解，在本申请的各种实施例中，上述各过程的序号的大小并不意味着执行顺序的先后，各过程的执行顺序应以其功能和内在逻辑确定，而不应对本申请实施例的实施过程构成任何限定。
所属领域的技术人员可以清楚地了解到，为描述的方便和简洁，上述描述的系统、装置和单元的具体工作过程，可以参考前述方法实施例中的对应过程，在此不再赘述。
以上所述仅为本申请的具体实施方式，但本申请的保护范围并不局限于此，任何熟悉本技术领域的技术人员在本申请揭露的技术范围内，可轻易想到变化或替换，都应涵盖在本申请的保护范围之内。因此，本申请的保护范围应以该权利要求的保护范围为准。

Claims (169)

  1. 一种通信方法，包括：
    第一多链路设备MLD执行第一监听操作，其中，所述第一监听操作用于所述第一MLD上的第一站点采用第一接收能力接收组播帧。
  2. 根据权利要求1所述的方法，其中，
    所述第一接收能力大于或等于第二接收能力，所述第二接收能力为所述第一MLD在执行第二监听操作下所述第一站点采用的接收能力。
  3. 根据权利要求1或2所述的方法，其中，所述第一多链路设备MLD执行第一监听操作，包括：
    所述第一MLD基于第一信息执行第一监听操作。
  4. 根据权利要求3所述的方法，其中，所述第一信息用于所述第一MLD在目标时间或目标时间之前执行所述第一监听操作。
  5. 根据权利要求4所述的方法，其中，所述目标时间包括第一时间点，所述第一时间点包括以下至少之一：
    预期的组播帧发送时间点；
    预期的传输流量指示图DTIM信标帧的目标信标发送时间TBTT；
    预期发送组播帧的广播目标唤醒时间TWT服务周期SP的起始时间；
    特定灵活多播服务FMS流的FMS计数器域当前计数值为零的非空时分组码non-STBC DTIM信标帧的TBTT；
    预期发送组播帧的带重试的组播GCR服务周期的起始时间。
  6. 根据权利要求5所述的方法，其中，所述第一时间点是所述第一MLD预先接收到的。
  7. 根据权利要求3或4所述的方法，其中，所述第一信息为传输流量指示图DTIM信标帧，所述DTIM信标帧用于所述第一MLD在目标时间或目标时间之前执行所述第一监听操作。
  8. 根据权利要求7所述的方法，其中，所述目标时间包括第二时间点，所述第二时间点包括：接收完DTIM信标帧之后的预期的组播帧发送时间点；所述DTIM信标帧是所述第一MLD在第二监听操作下所接收的。
  9. 根据权利要求8所述的方法，其中，所述第一MLD基于第一信息执行第一监听操作，包括：
    所述第一MLD在所述第二时间点或第二时间点之前从所述第二监听操作切换至所述第一监听操作；所述第二监听操作是所述第一MLD在预期传输的DTIM信标帧的目标信标发送时间TBTT之前所执行的。
  10. 根据权利要求3至6任一项所述的方法，其中，所述第一信息是基于第一指示确定的；所述第一指示用于指示在需要接收组播帧的情况下是否执行所述第一监听操作。
  11. 根据权利要求10所述的方法，其中，
    所述第一指示用于统一指示接入点AP对应的第一MLD在需要接收组播帧的情况下是否执行所述第一监听操作；
    所述接入点AP为与所述第一MLD所关联的第二MLD对应的AP；所述第二MLD对应的AP包括以下至少之一：
    第二MLD的附属AP，所述第二MLD的附属AP所在多BSSID集中BSSID所指的AP。
  12. 根据权利要求11所述的方法，其中，
    所述第一指示的取值为第一值的情况下，用于统一指示接入点AP对应的第一MLD在需要接收组播帧的情况下执行所述第一监听操作；
    或者，
    所述第一指示的取值为第二值的情况下，用于统一指示接入点AP对应的第一MLD在需要接收组播帧的情况下无需执行所述第一监听操作。
  13. 根据权利要求11或12所述的方法，其中，所述第一指示由EMLSR操作指示元素携带。
  14. 根据权利要求11至13任一项所述的方法，其中，所述第一指示由EMLSR操作指示元素中的第一字段携带。
  15. 根据权利要求14所述的方法，其中，所述第一字段包括第二指示；
    所述第二指示的取值为第三值的情况下，所述第一字段包括所述第一指示。
  16. 根据权利要求11至15任一项所述的方法，其中，所述第一指示为EMLSR操作统一指示。
  17. 根据权利要求10所述的方法，其中，
    所述第一指示中每一位的位置，用于指示接入点AP；所述接入点AP为与所述第一MLD所关联的第二MLD对应的AP；所述第二MLD对应的AP包括以下至少之一：第二MLD的附属AP，所述第 二MLD的附属AP所在多BSSID集中BSSID所指的AP；
    所述第一指示中每一位的值，用于指示接入点AP对应的第一MLD在需要接收组播帧的情况下是否执行所述第一监听操作。
  18. 根据权利要求17所述的方法，其中，
    所述第一指示中每一位的取值为第四值的情况下，用于指示接入点AP对应的第一MLD在需要接收组播帧的情况下执行所述第一监听操作；
    或者，
    所述第一指示中每一位的取值为第五值的情况下，用于指示接入点AP对应的第一MLD在需要接收组播帧的情况下无需执行所述第一监听操作。
  19. 根据权利要求17或18所述的方法，其中，所述第一指示由EMLSR操作指示元素携带。
  20. 根据权利要求17至19任一项所述的方法，其中，所述第一指示由EMLSR操作指示元素中的第二字段携带。
  21. 根据权利要求20所述的方法，其中，所述第二字段为部分EMLSR操作指示位图；所述部分EMLSR操作指示位图是通过截取EMLSR操作指示位图中部分连续比特而形成的。
  22. 根据权利要求15或21所述的方法，其中，所述EMLSR操作指示元素包括第一字段；
    所述第一字段中的第二指示的取值为第六值的情况下，所述第一字段包括第三指示；所述第三指示用于指示从所述EMLSR操作指示位图中截取的部分连续比特的位置。
  23. 根据权利要求22所述的方法，其中，所述第三指示为位图偏移量。
  24. 根据权利要求16或22或23所述的方法，其中，所述第二指示为EMLSR操作统一指示存在；其中，所述EMLSR操作统一指示存在用于指示第一字段中是否包括EMLSR操作统一指示。
  25. 根据权利要求14，15，22至24中任一项所述的方法，其中，所述第一字段为EMLSR操作指示位图控制。
  26. 根据权利要求13至15，19至25中任一项所述的方法，其中，所述EMLSR操作指示元素由管理帧携带。
  27. 根据权利要求26所述的方法，其中，所述管理帧包括流量指示图TIM信标帧。
  28. 根据权利要求26或27所述的方法，还包括：
    所述第一MLD接收所述管理帧。
  29. 根据权利要求3所述的方法，其中，所述第一信息为目标初始控制帧，用于告知在所述目标初始控制帧之后发送组播帧。
  30. 根据权利要求29所述的方法，其中，所述目标初始控制帧包括指示时长，所述指示时长为所述第一MLD切换至所述第一监听操作的最大可用时长。
  31. 根据权利要求30所述的方法，其中，所述目标初始控制帧为变体的多用户请求发送MU-RTS触发帧。
  32. 根据权利要求31所述的方法，其中，所述变体的MU-RTS触发帧的触发类型子域的取值与MU-RTS触发帧的触发类型子域的取值不同。
  33. 根据权利要求29至32任一项所述的方法，还包括：
    所述第一MLD接收所述目标初始控制帧，所述目标初始控制帧是第二MLD在需要第一MLD执行所述第一监听操作的情况下发送的，所述第二MLD为与所述第一MLD关联的MLD。
  34. 根据权利要求1至6，10至33中任一项所述的方法，其中，所述第一多链路设备MLD执行第一监听操作，包括：
    所述第一多链路设备MLD从第二监听操作切换至所述第一监听操作；或者，
    所述第一多链路设备MLD维持执行所述第一监听操作。
  35. 根据权利要求1至34任一项所述的方法，其中，所述第一接收能力包括以下至少之一：第一速率、第一调制与编码策略MCS、第一空间流SS以及第一带宽BW；
    和/或，第二接收能力包括以下至少之一：第二速率、第二调制与编码策略MCS、第二空间流SS以及第二带宽BW；所述第二接收能力为第二监听操作下所述第一站点具有的接收能力；
    其中，所述第一速率大于或等于第二速率；所述第一MCS优于或等于第二MCS；所述第一SS大于或等于第二SS；所述第一BW大于或等于第二BW。
  36. 根据权利要求35所述的方法，其中，所述第二监听操作用于所述第一MLD上的目标站点对所述目标站点所对应的链路进行监听，其中，所述目标站点为所述第一MLD上处于唤醒状态的站点，所述目标站点具有所述第二接收能力；所述第二接收能力包括如下至少之一：进行空闲信道评估CCA，接收用于发起帧交换的初始控制帧。
  37. 根据权利要求1至36任一项所述的方法，还包括：
    所述第一MLD通过采用所述第一接收能力的所述第一站点接收所述组播帧。
  38. 根据权利要求37所述的方法，其中，采用所述第一接收能力接收的所述组播帧由物理层协议数据单元PPDU携带，所述PPDU包括以下至少之一：
    正交频分复用OFDM物理层协议数据单元PPDU；
    非高吞吐量non-HT复制DUP PPDU；
    极高吞吐量VHT PPDU；
    高吞吐量HT PPDU；
    高效率HE单用户SU PPDU；
    极高吞吐量EHT多用户MU PPDU在内的极高吞吐量EHT站点STA所支持的PPDU。
  39. 根据权利要求1至38任一项所述的方法，还包括：
    所述第一MLD在所述组播帧接收完成的情况下，从所述第一监听操作切换至第二监听操作。
  40. 根据权利要求1至39任一项所述的方法，其中，所述第一站点为所述第一MLD上与第一链路对应的站点，所述第一站点用于监听所述第一链路；所述第一链路为发送所述组播帧的链路。
  41. 根据权利要求40所述的方法，其中，
    所述第一MLD为工作在增强多链路单无线EMLSR模式下的MLD，所述第一链路为EMLSR链路中的链路。
  42. 根据权利要求41所述的方法，其中，所述第一MLD为非接入点non-AP MLD。
  43. 根据权利要求41或42所述的方法，其中，
    所述第一多链路设备MLD执行第一监听操作为所述第一多链路设备MLD维持执行第一监听操作的情况下，所述第一监听操作还用于第二站点对所述EMLSR链路中的第二链路进行监听，所述第二站点为所述第一MLD上的站点，所述第二链路为所述EMLSR链路中除所述第一链路以外的链路；
    或者，
    在所述第一多链路设备MLD执行第一监听操作为所述第一多链路设备从第二监听操作切换至第一监听操作的情况下，所述第一监听操作使得所述第二站点无法进行监听。
  44. 一种通信方法，包括：
    第二多链路设备MLD发送第一信息，所述第一信息用于第一多链路设备MLD执行第一监听操作，所述第一监听操作用于所述第一MLD上的第一站点采用第一接收能力接收组播帧。
  45. 根据权利要求44所述的方法，其中，
    所述第一接收能力大于或等于第二接收能力，所述第二接收能力为第二监听操作所指示的所述第一MLD上的第一站点采用的接收能力，所述第二监听操作为所述第一MLD能够执行的监听操作。
  46. 根据权利要求44或45所述的方法，其中，所述第一信息用于所述第一MLD在目标时间或目标时间之前执行所述第一监听操作。
  47. 根据权利要求46所述的方法，其中，所述目标时间包括第一时间点，所述第一时间点包括以下至少之一：
    预期的组播帧发送时间点；
    预期的传输流量指示图DTIM信标帧的目标信标发送时间TBTT；
    预期发送组播帧的广播目标唤醒时间TWT服务周期SP的起始时间；
    特定灵活多播服务FMS流的FMS计数器域当前计数值为零的非空时分组码non-STBC DTIM信标帧的TBTT；
    预期发送组播帧的带重试的组播GCR服务周期的起始时间。
  48. 根据权利要求47所述的方法，其中，所述第一时间点是所述第二MLD确定的。
  49. 根据权利要求46所述的方法，所述第一信息为传输流量指示图DTIM信标帧，所述DTIM信标帧用于所述第一MLD在目标时间或目标时间之前执行所述第一监听操作。
  50. 根据权利要求49所述的方法，其中，所述目标时间包括第二时间点，所述第二时间点包括：所述第一MLD接收完DTIM信标帧之后的预期的组播帧发送时间点；所述DTIM信标帧是所述第一MLD在第二监听操作下所接收的。
  51. 根据权利要求50所述的方法，其中，所述DTIM信标帧用于所述第一MLD在所述第二时间点或所述第二时间点之前从第二监听操作切换至所述第一监听操作。
  52. 根据权利要求46至48任一项所述的方法，其中，所述第一信息是基于第一指示确定的；所述第一指示用于指示在需要接收组播帧的情况下是否执行所述第一监听操作。
  53. 根据权利要求52所述的方法，其中，
    所述第一指示用于统一指示接入点AP对应的第一MLD在需要接收组播帧的情况下是否执行所述第一监听操作；
    所述接入点AP为与所述第一MLD所关联的第二MLD对应的AP；所述第二MLD对应的AP包括以下至少之一：
    第二MLD的附属AP，所述第二MLD的附属AP所在多BSSID集中BSSID所指的AP。
  54. 根据权利要求53所述的方法，其中，
    所述第一指示的取值为第一值的情况下，用于统一指示接入点AP对应的第一MLD在需要接收组播帧的情况下执行所述第一监听操作；
    或者，
    所述第一指示的取值为第二值的情况下，用于统一指示接入点AP对应的第一MLD在需要接收组播帧的情况下无需执行所述第一监听操作。
  55. 根据权利要求53或54所述的方法，其中，所述第一指示由EMLSR操作指示元素携带。
  56. 根据权利要求53至55任一项所述的方法，其中，所述第一指示由EMLSR操作指示元素中的第一字段携带。
  57. 根据权利要求56所述的方法，其中，所述第一字段包括第二指示；
    所述第二指示的取值为第三值的情况下，所述第一字段包括所述第一指示。
  58. 根据权利要求53至57任一项所述的方法，其中，所述第一指示为EMLSR操作统一指示。
  59. 根据权利要求52所述的方法，其中，
    所述第一指示中每一位的位置，用于指示接入点AP；所述接入点AP为与所述第一MLD所关联的第二MLD对应的AP；所述第二MLD对应的AP包括以下至少之一：第二MLD的附属AP，所述第二MLD的附属AP所在多BSSID集中BSSID所指的AP；
    所述第一指示中每一位的值，用于指示接入点AP对应的第一MLD在需要接收组播帧的情况下是否执行所述第一监听操作。
  60. 根据权利要求59所述的方法，其中，
    所述第一指示中每一位的取值为第四值的情况下，用于指示接入点AP对应的第一MLD在需要接收组播帧的情况下执行所述第一监听操作；
    或者，
    所述第一指示中每一位的取值为第五值的情况下，用于指示接入点AP对应的第一MLD在需要接收组播帧的情况下无需执行所述第一监听操作。
  61. 根据权利要求59或60所述的方法，其中，所述第一指示由EMLSR操作指示元素携带。
  62. 根据权利要求59至61任一项所述的方法，其中，所述第一指示由所述MLSR操作指示元素中的第二字段携带。
  63. 根据权利要求62所述的方法，其中，所述第二字段为部分EMLSR操作指示位图；所述部分EMLSR操作指示位图是通过截取EMLSR操作指示位图中部分连续比特而形成的。
  64. 根据权利要求57或63所述的方法，其中，所述MLSR操作指示元素包括第一字段；
    所述第一字段中的第二指示的取值为第六值的情况下，所述第一字段包括第三指示；所述第三指示用于指示从所述EMLSR操作指示位图中截取的部分连续比特的位置。
  65. 根据权利要求64所述的方法，其中，所述第三指示为位图偏移量。
  66. 根据权利要求58或64或65所述的方法，其中，所述第二指示为EMLSR操作统一指示存在；所述EMLSR操作统一指示存在用于指示第一字段中是否包括EMLSR操作统一指示。
  67. 根据权利要求56，57，64至66中任一项所述的方法，其中，所述第一字段为EMLSR操作指示位图控制。
  68. 根据权利要求55至57，61至67中任一项所述的方法，其中，所述EMLSR操作指示元素由管理帧携带。
  69. 根据权利要求68所述的方法，其中，所述管理帧包括流量指示图TIM信标帧。
  70. 根据权利要求46所述的方法，其中，所述第一信息为目标初始控制帧，用于告知在所述目标初始控制帧之后发送组播帧。
  71. 根据权利要求70所述的方法，其中，所述目标初始控制帧包括指示时长，所述指示时长为所述第一MLD切换至所述第一监听操作的最大可用时长。
  72. 根据权利要求71所述的方法，其中，所述目标初始控制帧为变体的多用户请求发送MU-RTS触发帧。
  73. 根据权利要求72所述的方法，其中，所述变体的MU-RTS触发帧的触发类型子域的取值与 MU-RTS触发帧的触发类型子域的取值不同。
  74. 根据权利要求44至73任一项所述的方法，其中，所述第一接收能力包括以下至少之一：第一速率、第一调制与编码策略MCS、第一空间流SS以及第一带宽BW；
    和/或，第二接收能力包括以下至少之一：第二速率、第二调制与编码策略MCS、第二空间流SS以及第二带宽BW；所述第二接收能力为第二监听操作下所述第一站点具有的接收能力；
    其中，所述第一速率大于或等于第二速率；所述第一MCS优于或等于第二MCS所述第一SS大于或等于第二SS；所述第一BW大于或等于第二BW。
  75. 根据权利要求74所述的方法，其中，所述第二监听操作用于所述第一MLD上的目标站点对所述目标站点所对应的链路进行监听，其中，所述目标站点为所述第一MLD上处于唤醒状态的站点，所述目标站点具有所述第二接收能力；所述第二接收能力包括如下至少之一：进行空闲信道评估CCA，接收用于发起帧交换的初始控制帧。
  76. 根据权利要求44至75任一项所述的方法，还包括：
    所述第二MLD在以下时间点发送所述组播帧：
    预期的组播帧发送时间点；
    在发送传输流量指示图DTIM信标帧之后的时间点；
    在广播目标唤醒时间TWT服务周期SP内的时间点；
    在特定灵活多播服务FMS流的FMS计数器域当前计数值为零的非空时分组码non-STBC DTIM信标帧的TBTT之后的时间点；
    带重试的组播GCR服务周期内。
  77. 根据权利要求76所述的方法，其中，所述组播帧由物理层协议数据单元PPDU携带，所述PPDU包括以下至少之一：
    正交频分复用OFDM物理层协议数据单元PPDU；
    非高吞吐量non-HT复制DUP PPDU；
    极高吞吐量VHT PPDU；
    高吞吐量HT PPDU；
    高效率HE单用户SU PPDU；
    极高吞吐量EHT多用户MU PPDU在内的极高吞吐量EHT站点STA所支持的PPDU。
  78. 根据权利要求44至77任一项所述的方法，其中，所述第一站点为所述第一MLD上与第一链路对应的站点，所述第一站点用于监听所述第一链路；所述第一链路为发送所述组播帧的链路。
  79. 根据权利要求78所述的方法，其中，
    所述第一MLD和第二MLD为工作在增强多链路单无线EMLSR模式下的MLD，所述第一链路为EMLSR链路中的链路。
  80. 根据权利要求79所述的方法，其中，所述第二MLD为接入点AP MLD，所述第一MLD为与所述AP MLD对应的非接入点non-AP MLD。
  81. 根据权利要求79或80所述的方法，其中，
    所述第一多链路设备MLD执行第一监听操作为所述第一多链路设备MLD维持执行第一监听操作的情况下，所述第一监听操作还用于第二站点对所述EMLSR链路中的第二链路进行监听，所述第二站点为所述第一MLD上的站点，所述第二链路为所述EMLSR链路中除所述第一链路以外的链路；
    或者，
    在所述第一多链路设备MLD执行第一监听操作为所述第一多链路设备从第二监听操作切换至第一监听操作的情况下，所述第一监听操作使得所述第二站点无法进行监听。
  82. 一种第一多链路设备，包括：
    处理单元，用于执行第一监听操作，其中，所述第一监听操作用于第一多链路设备MLD上的第一站点采用第一接收能力接收组播帧。
  83. 根据权利要求82所述的设备，其中，
    所述第一接收能力大于或等于第二接收能力，所述第二接收能力为所述第一MLD在执行第二监听操作下所述第一站点采用的接收能力。
  84. 根据权利要求82或83所述的设备，其中，所述处理单元，具体用于基于第一信息执行第一监听操作。
  85. 根据权利要求84所述的设备，其中，所述第一信息用于所述第一MLD在目标时间或目标时间之前执行所述第一监听操作。
  86. 根据权利要求85所述的设备，其中，所述目标时间包括第一时间点，所述第一时间点包括 以下至少之一：
    预期的组播帧发送时间点；
    预期的传输流量指示图DTIM信标帧的目标信标发送时间TBTT；
    预期发送组播帧的广播目标唤醒时间TWT服务周期SP的起始时间；
    特定灵活多播服务FMS流的FMS计数器域当前计数值为零的非空时分组码non-STBC DTIM信标帧的TBTT；
    预期发送组播帧的带重试的组播GCR服务周期的起始时间。
  87. 根据权利要求86所述的设备，其中，所述第一时间点是所述第一MLD预先接收到的。
  88. 根据权利要求84或85所述的设备，其中，所述第一信息为传输流量指示图DTIM信标帧，所述DTIM信标帧用于所述第一MLD在目标时间或目标时间之前执行所述第一监听操作。
  89. 根据权利要求88所述的设备，其中，所述目标时间包括第二时间点，所述第二时间点包括：接收完传输流量指示图DTIM信标帧之后的预期的组播帧发送时间点；所述DTIM信标帧是所述第一MLD在第二监听操作下所接收的。
  90. 根据权利要求89所述的设备，其中，所述处理单元，具体用于在所述第二时间点或第二时间点之前从所述第二监听操作切换至所述第一监听操作；所述第二监听操作是所述第一MLD在预期传输的DTIM信标帧的目标信标发送时间TBTT之前所执行的。
  91. 根据权利要求84至87任一项所述的设备，其中，所述第一信息是基于第一指示确定的；所述第一指示用于指示在需要接收组播帧的情况下是否执行所述第一监听操作。
  92. 根据权利要求91所述的设备，其中，
    所述第一指示用于统一指示接入点AP对应的第一MLD在需要接收组播帧的情况下是否执行所述第一监听操作；
    所述接入点AP为与所述第一MLD所关联的第二MLD对应的AP；所述第二MLD对应的AP包括以下至少之一：
    第二MLD的附属AP，所述第二MLD的附属AP所在多BSSID集中BSSID所指的AP。
  93. 根据权利要求92所述的设备，其中，
    所述第一指示的取值为第一值的情况下，用于统一指示接入点AP对应的第一MLD在需要接收组播帧的情况下执行所述第一监听操作；
    或者，
    所述第一指示的取值为第二值的情况下，用于统一指示接入点AP对应的第一MLD在需要接收组播帧的情况下无需执行所述第一监听操作。
  94. 根据权利要求92或93所述的设备，其中，所述第一指示由EMLSR操作指示元素携带。
  95. 根据权利要求92至94任一项所述的设备，其中，所述第一指示由EMLSR操作指示元素中的第一字段携带。
  96. 根据权利要求95所述的设备，其中，所述第一字段包括第二指示；
    所述第二指示的取值为第三值的情况下，所述第一字段包括所述第一指示。
  97. 根据权利要求92至96任一项所述的设备，其中，所述第一指示为EMLSR操作统一指示。
  98. 根据权利要求91所述的设备，其中，
    所述第一指示中每一位的位置，用于指示接入点AP；所述接入点AP为与所述第一MLD所关联的第二MLD对应的AP；所述第二MLD对应的AP包括以下至少之一：第二MLD的附属AP，所述第二MLD的附属AP所在多BSSID集中BSSID所指的AP；
    所述第一指示中每一位的值，用于指示接入点AP对应的第一MLD在需要接收组播帧的情况下是否执行所述第一监听操作。
  99. 根据权利要求98所述的设备，其中，
    所述第一指示中每一位的取值为第四值的情况下，用于指示接入点AP对应的第一MLD在需要接收组播帧的情况下执行所述第一监听操作；
    或者，
    所述第一指示中每一位的取值为第五值的情况下，用于指示接入点AP对应的第一MLD在需要接收组播帧的情况下无需执行所述第一监听操作。
  100. 根据权利要求98或99所述的设备，其中，所述第一指示由EMLSR操作指示元素携带。
  101. 根据权利要求98至100任一项所述的设备，其中，所述第一指示由EMLSR操作指示元素中的第二字段携带。
  102. 根据权利要求101所述的设备，其中，所述第二字段为部分EMLSR操作指示位图；所述部 分EMLSR操作指示位图是通过截取EMLSR操作指示位图中部分连续比特而形成的。
  103. 根据权利要求96或102所述的设备，其中，所述EMLSR操作指示元素包括第一字段；
    所述第一字段中的第二指示的取值为第六值的情况下，所述第一字段包括第三指示；所述第三指示用于指示从所述EMLSR操作指示位图中截取的部分连续比特的位置。
  104. 根据权利要求103所述的设备，其中，所述第三指示为位图偏移量。
  105. 根据权利要求97或103或104所述的设备，其中，所述第二指示为EMLSR操作统一指示存在；其中，所述EMLSR操作统一指示存在用于指示第一字段中是否包括EMLSR操作统一指示。
  106. 根据权利要求95，96，103至105中任一项所述的设备，其中，所述第一字段为EMLSR操作指示位图控制。
  107. 根据权利要求94至96，100至106中任一项所述的设备，其中，所述EMLSR操作指示元素由管理帧携带。
  108. 根据权利要求107所述的设备，其中，所述管理帧包括流量指示图TIM信标帧。
  109. 根据权利要求107或108所述的设备，还包括：
    第一接收单元，用于接收所述管理帧。
  110. 根据权利要求84所述的设备，其中，所述第一信息为目标初始控制帧，用于告知在所述目标初始控制帧之后发送组播帧。
  111. 根据权利要求110所述的设备，其中，所述目标初始控制帧包括指示时长，所述指示时长为所述第一MLD切换至所述第一监听操作的最大可用时长。
  112. 根据权利要求111所述的设备，其中，所述目标初始控制帧为变体的多用户请求发送MU-RTS触发帧。
  113. 根据权利要求112所述的设备，其中，所述变体的MU-RTS触发帧的触发类型子域的取值与MU-RTS触发帧的触发类型子域的取值不同。
  114. 根据权利要求110至113任一项所述的设备，还包括：
    第二接收单元，用于接收所述目标初始控制帧，所述目标初始控制帧是第二MLD在需要第一MLD执行所述第一监听操作的情况下发送的，所述第二MLD为与所述第一MLD关联的MLD。
  115. 根据权利要求82至87，91至114中任一项所述的设备，其中，所述处理单元，具体用于：从第二监听操作切换至所述第一监听操作；或者，维持执行所述第一监听操作。
  116. 根据权利要求82至115任一项所述的设备，其中，所述第一接收能力包括以下至少之一：第一速率、第一调制与编码策略MCS、第一空间流SS以及第一带宽BW；
    和/或，第二接收能力包括以下至少之一：第二速率、第二调制与编码策略MCS、第二空间流SS以及第二带宽BW；所述第二接收能力为第二监听操作下所述第一站点具有的接收能力；
    其中，所述第一速率大于或等于第二速率；所述第一MCS优于或等于第二MCS；所述第一SS大于或等于第二SS；所述第一BW大于或等于第二BW。
  117. 根据权利要求116所述的设备，其中，所述第二监听操作用于所述第一MLD上的目标站点对所述目标站点所对应的链路进行监听，其中，所述目标站点为所述第一MLD上处于唤醒状态的站点，所述目标站点具有所述第二接收能力；所述第二接收能力包括如下至少之一：进行空闲信道评估CCA，接收用于发起帧交换的初始控制帧。
  118. 根据权利要求82至117任一项所述的设备，还包括：
    第三接收单元，用于通过采用所述第一接收能力的所述第一站点接收所述组播帧。
  119. 根据权利要求118所述的设备，其中，采用所述第一接收能力接收的所述组播帧由物理层协议数据单元PPDU携带，所述PPDU包括以下至少之一：
    正交频分复用OFDM物理层协议数据单元PPDU；
    非高吞吐量non-HT复制DUP PPDU；
    极高吞吐量VHT PPDU；
    高吞吐量HT PPDU；
    高效率HE单用户SU PPDU；
    极高吞吐量EHT多用户MU PPDU在内的极高吞吐量EHT站点STA所支持的PPDU。
  120. 根据权利要求82至119任一项所述的设备，还包括：
    所述处理单元，还用于在所述组播帧接收完成的情况下，从所述第一监听操作切换至第二监听操作。
  121. 根据权利要求82至120任一项所述的设备，其中，所述第一站点为所述第一MLD上与第一链路对应的站点，所述第一站点用于监听所述第一链路；所述第一链路为发送所述组播帧的链路。
  122. 根据权利要求121所述的设备，其中，
    所述第一MLD为工作在增强多链路单无线EMLSR模式下的MLD，所述第一链路为EMLSR链路中的链路。
  123. 根据权利要求122所述的设备，其中，所述第一MLD为非接入点non-AP MLD。
  124. 根据权利要求122或123所述的设备，其中，所述第一多链路设备MLD执行第一监听操作为所述第一多链路设备MLD维持执行第一监听操作的情况下，所述第一监听操作还用于第二站点对所述EMLSR链路中的第二链路进行监听，所述第二站点为所述第一MLD上的站点，所述第二链路为所述EMLSR链路中除所述第一链路以外的链路；
    或者，
    在所述第一多链路设备MLD执行第一监听操作为所述第一多链路设备从第二监听操作切换至第一监听操作的情况下，所述第一监听操作使得所述第二站点无法进行监听。
  125. 一种第二多链路设备，包括：
    发送单元，用于发送第一信息，所述第一信息用于第一多链路设备MLD执行第一监听操作，所述第一监听操作用于所述第一MLD上的第一站点采用第一接收能力接收组播帧。
  126. 根据权利要求125所述的设备，其中，
    所述第一接收能力大于或等于第二接收能力，所述第二接收能力为第二监听操作所指示的所述第一MLD上的第一站点采用的接收能力，所述第二监听操作为所述第一MLD能够执行的监听操作。
  127. 根据权利要求125或126所述的设备，其中，所述第一信息用于所述第一MLD在目标时间或目标时间之前执行所述第一监听操作。
  128. 根据权利要求127所述的设备，其中，所述目标时间包括第一时间点，所述第一时间点包括以下至少之一：
    预期的组播帧发送时间点；
    预期的传输流量指示图DTIM信标帧的目标信标发送时间TBTT；
    预期发送组播帧的广播目标唤醒时间TWT服务周期SP的起始时间；
    特定灵活多播服务FMS流的FMS计数器域当前计数值为零的非空时分组码non-STBC DTIM信标帧的TBTT；
    预期发送组播帧的带重试的组播GCR服务周期的起始时间。
  129. 根据权利要求128所述的设备，其中，所述第一时间点是所述第二MLD确定的。
  130. 根据权利要求127所述的设备，其中，所述第一信息为传输流量指示图DTIM信标帧，所述DTIM信标帧用于所述第一MLD在目标时间或目标时间之前执行所述第一监听操作。
  131. 根据权利要求130所述的设备，其中，所述目标时间包括第二时间点，所述第二时间点包括：所述第一MLD接收完DTIM信标帧之后的预期的组播帧发送时间点；所述DTIM信标帧是所述第一MLD在第二监听操作下所接收的。
  132. 根据权利要求131所述的设备，其中，所述DTIM信标帧用于所述第一MLD在所述第二时间点或所述第二时间点之前从第二监听操作切换至所述第一监听操作。
  133. 根据权利要求127至129任一项所述的设备，其中，所述第一信息是基于第一指示确定的；所述第一指示用于指示在需要接收组播帧的情况下是否执行所述第一监听操作。
  134. 根据权利要求133所述的设备，其中，
    所述第一指示用于统一指示接入点AP对应的第一MLD在需要接收组播帧的情况下是否执行所述第一监听操作；
    所述接入点AP为与所述第一MLD所关联的第二MLD对应的AP；所述第二MLD对应的AP包括以下至少之一：
    第二MLD的附属AP，所述第二MLD的附属AP所在多BSSID集中BSSID所指的AP。
  135. 根据权利要求134所述的设备，其中，
    所述第一指示的取值为第一值的情况下，用于统一指示接入点AP对应的第一MLD在需要接收组播帧的情况下执行所述第一监听操作；
    或者，
    所述第一指示的取值为第二值的情况下，用于统一指示接入点AP对应的第一MLD在需要接收组播帧的情况下无需执行所述第一监听操作。
  136. 根据权利要求134或135所述的设备，其中，所述第一指示由EMLSR操作指示元素携带。
  137. 根据权利要求134至136任一项所述的设备，其中，所述第一指示由EMLSR操作指示元素中的第一字段携带。
  138. 根据权利要求137所述的设备，其中，所述第一字段包括第二指示；
    所述第二指示的取值为第三值的情况下，所述第一字段包括所述第一指示。
  139. 根据权利要求134至138任一项所述的设备，其中，所述第一指示为EMLSR操作统一指示。
  140. 根据权利要求133所述的设备，其中，
    所述第一指示中每一位的位置，用于指示接入点AP；所述接入点AP为与所述第一MLD所关联的第二MLD对应的AP；所述第二MLD对应的AP包括以下至少之一：第二MLD的附属AP，所述第二MLD的附属AP所在多BSSID集中BSSID所指的AP；
    所述第一指示中每一位的值，用于指示接入点AP对应的第一MLD在需要接收组播帧的情况下是否执行所述第一监听操作。
  141. 根据权利要求140所述的设备，其中，
    所述第一指示中每一位的取值为第四值的情况下，用于指示接入点AP对应的第一MLD在需要接收组播帧的情况下执行所述第一监听操作；
    或者，
    所述第一指示中每一位的取值为第五值的情况下，用于指示接入点AP对应的第一MLD在需要接收组播帧的情况下无需执行所述第一监听操作。
  142. 根据权利要求140或141所述的设备，其中，所述第一指示由EMLSR操作指示元素携带。
  143. 根据权利要求140至142任一项所述的设备，其中，所述第一指示由MLSR操作指示元素中的第二字段携带。
  144. 根据权利要求143所述的设备，其中，所述第二字段为部分EMLSR操作指示位图；所述部分EMLSR操作指示位图是通过截取EMLSR操作指示位图中部分连续比特而形成的。
  145. 根据权利要求138或144所述的设备，其中，所述MLSR操作指示元素包括第一字段；
    所述第一字段中的第二指示的取值为第六值的情况下，所述第一字段包括第三指示；所述第三指示用于指示从所述EMLSR操作指示位图中截取的部分连续比特的位置。
  146. 根据权利要求145所述的设备，其中，所述第三指示为位图偏移量。
  147. 根据权利要求139或145或146所述的设备，其中，所述第二指示为EMLSR操作统一指示存在；所述EMLSR操作统一指示存在用于指示第一字段中是否包括EMLSR操作统一指示。
  148. 根据权利要求137，138，145至147中任一项所述的设备，其中，所述第一字段为EMLSR操作指示位图控制。
  149. 根据权利要求136至138，142至148中任一项所述的设备，其中，所述EMLSR操作指示元素由管理帧携带。
  150. 根据权利要求149所述的设备，其中，所述管理帧包括流量指示图TIM信标帧。
  151. 根据权利要求127所述的设备，其中，所述第一信息为目标初始控制帧，用于告知在所述目标初始控制帧之后发送组播帧。
  152. 根据权利要求151所述的设备，其中，所述目标初始控制帧包括指示时长，所述指示时长为所述第一MLD切换至所述第一监听操作的最大可用时长。
  153. 根据权利要求152所述的设备，其中，所述指示时长由目标初始控制帧携带；所述目标初始控制帧为变体的多用户请求发送MU-RTS触发帧。
  154. 根据权利要求153所述的设备，其中，所述变体的MU-RTS触发帧的触发类型子域的取值与MU-RTS触发帧的触发类型子域的取值不同。
  155. 根据权利要求125至154任一项所述的设备，其中，所述第一接收能力包括以下至少之一：第一速率、第一调制与编码策略MCS、第一空间流SS以及第一带宽BW；
    和/或，第二接收能力包括以下至少之一：第二速率、第二调制与编码策略MCS、第二空间流SS以及第二带宽BW；所述第二接收能力为第二监听操作下所述第一站点具有的接收能力；
    其中，所述第一速率大于或等于第二速率；所述第一MCS优于或等于第二MCS；所述第一SS大于或等于第二SS；所述第一BW大于或等于第二BW。
  156. 根据权利要求155所述的设备，其中，所述第二监听操作用于所述第一MLD上的目标站点对所述目标站点所对应的链路进行监听，其中，所述目标站点为所述第一MLD上处于唤醒状态的站点，所述目标站点具有所述第二接收能力；所述第二接收能力包括如下至少之一：进行空闲信道评估CCA，接收用于发起帧交换的初始控制帧。
  157. 根据权利要求125至156任一项所述的设备，其中，
    所述发送单元，还用于在以下时间点发送所述组播帧：
    预期的组播帧发送时间点；
    在发送传输流量指示图DTIM信标帧之后的时间点；
    在广播目标唤醒时间TWT服务周期SP内的时间点；
    在特定灵活多播服务FMS流的FMS计数器域当前计数值为零的非空时分组码non-STBC DTIM信标帧的TBTT之后的时间点；
    带重试的组播GCR服务周期内。
  158. 根据权利要求157所述的设备，其中，所述组播帧由物理层协议数据单元PPDU携带，所述PPDU包括以下至少之一：
    正交频分复用OFDM物理层协议数据单元PPDU；
    非高吞吐量non-HT复制DUP PPDU；
    极高吞吐量VHT PPDU；
    高吞吐量HT PPDU；
    高效率HE单用户SU PPDU；
    极高吞吐量EHT多用户MU PPDU在内的极高吞吐量EHT站点STA所支持的PPDU。
  159. 根据权利要求125至158任一项所述的设备，其中，所述第一站点为所述第一MLD上与第一链路对应的站点，所述第一站点用于监听所述第一链路；所述第一链路为发送所述组播帧的链路。
  160. 根据权利要求159所述的设备，其中，
    所述第一MLD和第二MLD为工作在增强多链路单无线EMLSR模式下的MLD，所述第一链路为EMLSR链路中的链路。
  161. 根据权利要求160所述的设备，其中，所述第二MLD为接入点AP MLD，所述第一MLD为与所述AP MLD对应的非接入点non-AP MLD。
  162. 根据权利要求160或161所述的设备，其中，
    所述第一多链路设备MLD执行第一监听操作为所述第一多链路设备MLD维持执行第一监听操作的情况下，所述第一监听操作还用于第二站点对所述EMLSR链路中的第二链路进行监听，所述第二站点为所述第一MLD上的站点，所述第二链路为所述EMLSR链路中除所述第一链路以外的链路；
    或者，
    在所述第一多链路设备MLD执行第一监听操作为所述第一多链路设备从第二监听操作切换至第一监听操作的情况下，所述第一监听操作使得所述第二站点无法进行监听。
  163. 一种第一多链路设备，包括：处理器和存储器，该存储器用于存储计算机程序，所述处理器用于调用并运行所述存储器中存储的计算机程序，以使所述第一多链路设备执行如权利要求1至43中任一项所述的方法。
  164. 一种第二多链路设备，包括：处理器和存储器，该存储器用于存储计算机程序，所述处理器用于调用并运行所述存储器中存储的计算机程序，以使所述第二多链路设备执行如权利要求44至81中任一项所述的方法。
  165. 一种芯片，包括：处理器，用于从存储器中调用并运行计算机程序，使得安装有所述芯片的设备执行如权利要求1至81中任一项所述的方法。
  166. 一种计算机可读存储介质，用于存储计算机程序，当所述计算机程序被设备运行时使得所述设备执行如权利要求1至81中任一项所述的方法。
  167. 一种计算机程序产品，包括计算机程序指令，该计算机程序指令使得计算机执行如权利要求1至81中任一项所述的方法。
  168. 一种计算机程序，所述计算机程序使得计算机执行如权利要求1至81中任一项所述的方法。
  169. 一种通信系统，包括：
    第一多链路设备，用于执行如权利要求1至43中任一项所述的方法；
    第二多链路设备，用于执行如权利要求44至81中任一项所述的方法。
PCT/CN2022/090805 2022-04-29 2022-04-29 通信方法和设备 WO2023206579A1 (zh)

Priority Applications (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN202280093616.0A CN118872309A (zh) 2022-04-29 2022-04-29 通信方法和设备
PCT/CN2022/090805 WO2023206579A1 (zh) 2022-04-29 2022-04-29 通信方法和设备

Applications Claiming Priority (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
PCT/CN2022/090805 WO2023206579A1 (zh) 2022-04-29 2022-04-29 通信方法和设备

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2023206579A1 true WO2023206579A1 (zh) 2023-11-02

Family

ID=88517000

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2022/090805 WO2023206579A1 (zh) 2022-04-29 2022-04-29 通信方法和设备

Country Status (2)

Country Link
CN (1) CN118872309A (zh)
WO (1) WO2023206579A1 (zh)

Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN112512135A (zh) * 2020-08-31 2021-03-16 中兴通讯股份有限公司 一种多链路设备、通信方法及存储介质
US20210084711A1 (en) * 2019-09-16 2021-03-18 Minyoung Park Multi-link operation for a single radio multi-link device
CN113541890A (zh) * 2020-04-14 2021-10-22 华为技术有限公司 一种通信方法和通信装置
CN114071779A (zh) * 2020-08-07 2022-02-18 三星电子株式会社 用于多链路空间复用的系统、方法和装置

Patent Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20210084711A1 (en) * 2019-09-16 2021-03-18 Minyoung Park Multi-link operation for a single radio multi-link device
CN113541890A (zh) * 2020-04-14 2021-10-22 华为技术有限公司 一种通信方法和通信装置
CN114071779A (zh) * 2020-08-07 2022-02-18 三星电子株式会社 用于多链路空间复用的系统、方法和装置
CN112512135A (zh) * 2020-08-31 2021-03-16 中兴通讯股份有限公司 一种多链路设备、通信方法及存储介质

Non-Patent Citations (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
YOUNG HOON KWON (NXP): "PDT MAC MLO enhanced multi-link operation mode", IEEE DRAFT; 11-20-1440-07-00BE-PDT-MAC-MLO-ENHANCED-MULTI-LINK-OPERATION-MODE, IEEE-SA MENTOR, PISCATAWAY, NJ USA, vol. 802.11 EHT; 802.11be, no. 7, 28 September 2020 (2020-09-28), Piscataway, NJ USA , pages 1 - 3, XP068173625 *

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN118872309A (zh) 2024-10-29

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
JP7309030B2 (ja) マルチリンク通信方法及び装置
US11825558B2 (en) Wireless communication method using enhanced distributed channel access, and wireless communication terminal using same
US9706576B2 (en) Method for multicast frame transmission and duplicated multicast frame detection
US20200221538A1 (en) Data transmission method, terminal device, and network device
WO2021139709A1 (zh) 一种设备到设备d2d传输方法及通信装置
KR102148315B1 (ko) 웨이크업 프레임 전송 방법, 및 노드 웨이크업 후에 제1 프레임을 전송하기 위한 방법, 디바이스 및 장비
JP2023528106A (ja) データ送信方法及び装置、データ受信方法及び装置
US20240357656A1 (en) Method and apparatus for wireless communication, and communication device
US20230292385A1 (en) Base station and terminal apparatus
US10292155B2 (en) Method and device for receiving multicast frame in wireless LAN
CN115707088A (zh) 支持无线tsn的ap mld进行数据传输的方法及装置
WO2016187836A1 (zh) 信道接入方法、接入点及站点
US20230043522A1 (en) Receive chain enabled state switching method and first multi-link device
WO2021016979A1 (zh) 无线通信方法和终端设备
WO2023206579A1 (zh) 通信方法和设备
WO2020073235A1 (zh) 一种通信方法及装置
WO2023039734A1 (zh) 多链路通信方法、装置、设备及介质
WO2023159404A1 (zh) 通信方法和多链路设备
WO2023092487A1 (zh) 无线通信的方法和设备
WO2024109614A1 (zh) 信息指示方法及设备
WO2024087030A1 (zh) 无线通信的方法、接入点设备和站点设备
WO2023206045A1 (zh) 通信方法和设备
WO2024027836A1 (zh) 数据传输方法及装置
WO2023133706A1 (zh) 一种数据传输方法及装置、终端设备、网络设备
WO2023168638A1 (zh) 无线通信的方法及设备

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 22939423

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 2022939423

Country of ref document: EP

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2022939423

Country of ref document: EP

Effective date: 20241023